5495 lines
267 KiB
Plaintext
5495 lines
267 KiB
Plaintext
msgid ""
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
"Project-Id-Version: PACKAGE VERSION\n"
|
|
"POT-Creation-Date: 2006-07-06 12:35+0200\n"
|
|
"PO-Revision-Date: YEAR-MO-DA HO:MI+ZONE\n"
|
|
"Last-Translator: FULL NAME <EMAIL@ADDRESS>\n"
|
|
"Language-Team: LANGUAGE <LL@li.org>\n"
|
|
"MIME-Version: 1.0\n"
|
|
"Content-Type: text/plain; charset=UTF-8\n"
|
|
"Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit\n"
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:451(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/researcher.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:489(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/first-open.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:594(None) gramps-manual.xml:777(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/mainwin.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:801(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/noside-nofilt.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:861(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/column-editor.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:904(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/side-filt.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:945(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/family.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1080(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/family-list.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1121(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/pedigree.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1156(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/pedigree-child-cut.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1183(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/pedigree-siblings-cut.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1223(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/events.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1278(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/sources.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1326(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/places.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1365(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/media.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1394(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/repository.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1691(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/export-druid.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1814(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/gedcom-export.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2037(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-family.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2061(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/select-person.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2122(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/select-family.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2151(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/family-warn.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2199(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/child-ref.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2412(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-person.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2548(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-person-names.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2611(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-person-attributes.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2656(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-person-addresses.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2687(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-person-notes.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2734(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-person-sources.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2812(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-person-gallery.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2863(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-person-internet.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2906(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-person-lds.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3136(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/date-selection.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3199(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-rel.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3414(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-src.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3566(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-plc.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3745(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-media.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3883(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-ev.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3985(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-si.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4044(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-an.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4173(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-at.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4284(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-ad.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4436(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/comp-people.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4490(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/merge-people.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4543(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/merge-src.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4584(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/merge-plc.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4840(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/edit-bm.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4874(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/find-people.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5071(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/bookreport.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5985(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/cfe-df.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6027(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/cfe-ar.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6091(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/scratch-pad.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. When image changes, this message will be marked fuzzy or untranslated for you.
|
|
#. It doesn't matter what you translate it to: it's not used at all.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6211(None)
|
|
msgid "@@image: 'figures/prefs.png'; md5=THIS FILE DOESN'T EXIST"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:29(title) gramps-manual.xml:150(revnumber)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS Manual V3.0"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:32(year) gramps-manual.xml:246(date) gramps-manual.xml:259(date)
|
|
msgid "2001"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:34(holder)
|
|
msgid "Donald N. Allingham"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:38(year)
|
|
msgid "2003-2005"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:40(holder)
|
|
msgid "Alex Roitman"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:59(publishername) gramps-manual.xml:90(orgname) gramps-manual.xml:102(orgname) gramps-manual.xml:158(para) gramps-manual.xml:171(para) gramps-manual.xml:184(para) gramps-manual.xml:197(para) gramps-manual.xml:213(para) gramps-manual.xml:226(para) gramps-manual.xml:239(para) gramps-manual.xml:252(para) gramps-manual.xml:265(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS Project"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:63(para)
|
|
msgid "This manual is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:68(para)
|
|
msgid "This manual is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:73(para)
|
|
msgid "You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:85(firstname)
|
|
msgid "Alex"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:87(surname)
|
|
msgid "Roitman"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:92(email)
|
|
msgid "shura@gramps-project.org"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:97(firstname)
|
|
msgid "Donald N."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:99(surname)
|
|
msgid "Allingham"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:104(email)
|
|
msgid "don@gramps-project.org"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:152(date)
|
|
msgid "July 2006"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:155(para) gramps-manual.xml:168(para) gramps-manual.xml:181(para) gramps-manual.xml:194(para) gramps-manual.xml:207(para) gramps-manual.xml:223(para) gramps-manual.xml:236(para)
|
|
msgid "Alex Roitman <email>shura@gramps-project.org</email>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:163(revnumber)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS Manual V2.5"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:165(date)
|
|
msgid "February 2004"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:176(revnumber)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS Manual V2.4"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:178(date)
|
|
msgid "December 2003"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:189(revnumber)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS Manual V2.3"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:191(date)
|
|
msgid "September 2003"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:202(revnumber)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS Manual V2.2"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:204(date)
|
|
msgid "July 2003"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:210(para)
|
|
msgid "Donald A. Peterson <email>dpeterson@sigmaxi.org</email>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:218(revnumber)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS Manual V2.1"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:220(date)
|
|
msgid "May 2003"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:231(revnumber)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS Manual V2.0"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:233(date)
|
|
msgid "April 2003"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:244(revnumber)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS User Manual V1.1"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:249(para) gramps-manual.xml:262(para)
|
|
msgid "Donald N. Allingham <email>don@gramps-project.org</email>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:257(revnumber)
|
|
msgid "gramps User Manual V1.0"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:270(releaseinfo)
|
|
msgid "This manual describes version 2.2.0 of GRAMPS."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:274(title)
|
|
msgid "Preface"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:276(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS is a software package designed for genealogical research. Although similar to other genealogical programs, GRAMPS offers some unique and powerful features, which we'll discuss below."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:280(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS is a Open Source Software package, which means you are free to make copies and distribute it to anyone you like. It's developed and maintained by a worldwide team of volunteers whose goal is to make GRAMPS powerful, yet easy to use."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:286(title)
|
|
msgid "Why use GRAMPS?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:288(para)
|
|
msgid "Most genealogy programs allow you to enter information about your ancestors and descendants. Typically, they can display family relationships through charts, graphs, or reports. Some allow you to include pictures or other media. Most let you include information about people even if those people are not related to the primary family you happen to be researching. And they may include features that let you exchange data with other programs and print different types of reports."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:297(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS has all these capabilities and more. Notably, it allows you to integrate bits and pieces of data as they arise from your research and to put them in one place -- your computer. You can then use your computer to manipulate, correlate, and analyze your data, rather than messing with reams of paper."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:305(title)
|
|
msgid "Typographical conventions"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:310(application)
|
|
msgid "Applications"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:314(simpara)
|
|
msgid "<command>Commands</command> you type at the command line"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:319(filename)
|
|
msgid "Filenames"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:323(replaceable)
|
|
msgid "Replaceable text"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:327(simpara)
|
|
msgid "<guilabel>Labels</guilabel> for buttons and other portions of the graphical interface"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:332(simpara)
|
|
msgid "Menu selections look like this: <menuchoice><guimenu>Menu</guimenu><guisubmenu>Submenu</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Menu Item</guimenuitem></menuchoice>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:342(simpara)
|
|
msgid "<guibutton>Buttons</guibutton> you can click"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:346(userinput)
|
|
#, no-wrap
|
|
msgid "Anything you type in"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:307(para)
|
|
msgid "In this book, some words are marked with special typography: <placeholder-1/>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:352(title)
|
|
msgid "Example Tip"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:354(para)
|
|
msgid "Tips and bits of extra information will look like this."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:356(title)
|
|
msgid "Example Note"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:358(para)
|
|
msgid "Notes will look like this."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:350(para)
|
|
msgid "The manual also provides assorted bits of additional information in tips and notes, as follows. <tip id=\"example-tip\"><placeholder-1/><placeholder-2/></tip><note id=\"example-note\"><placeholder-3/><placeholder-4/></note>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:363(title)
|
|
msgid "Example Warning"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:365(para)
|
|
msgid "This is what a warning looks like. If there's a chance you'll run into trouble, you will be warned beforehand."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:361(para)
|
|
msgid "Finally, there are warnings, notifying you where you should be careful: <warning id=\"example-warning\"><placeholder-1/><placeholder-2/></warning>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:372(title)
|
|
msgid "Getting Started"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:374(para)
|
|
msgid "In this chapter, we'll begin with the basics. We'll show you how to start GRAMPS and how to get help when you need it."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:378(title)
|
|
msgid "To Start GRAMPS"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:380(para)
|
|
msgid "You can start GRAMPS in the following ways:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:384(term)
|
|
msgid "From the <guimenu>Applications</guimenu> menu"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:387(para)
|
|
msgid "Select GRAMPS from the list of programs displayed in your computer's Applications menu. (The location and appearance of this menu vary slightly from one distribution of Linux to another. On the default GNOME desktop, you'll find GRAMPS in the <menuchoice><guimenu>Applications</guimenu><guisubmenu>Other</guisubmenu></menuchoice> menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:399(term)
|
|
msgid "From the command line"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:402(para)
|
|
msgid "If you're adept with Linux and like to work from the command line, you can start GRAMPS by calling up a terminal window, typing <command>gramps</command>, and then pressing <keycap>Enter</keycap>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:407(para)
|
|
msgid "If you would like GRAMPS to open a specific database or to import a specific file on startup, you can supply the filename as a command line argument:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:411(filename)
|
|
msgid "gramps filename.grdb"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:413(para)
|
|
msgid "where <filename>filename.grdb</filename> is the name of the file you want to open. The command line provides many more ways to start GRAMPS and perform different tasks."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:422(title)
|
|
msgid "Running GRAMPS for the first time"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:424(para)
|
|
msgid "The first time you run the program, GRAMPS will display the \"Getting Started\" dialogs. Follow the directions that guide you through <guilabel>Researcher information</guilabel> and <guilabel>the LDS extensions</guilabel> sections. You should find them to be self-explanatory."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:431(title)
|
|
msgid "Dialog boxes"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:433(para)
|
|
msgid "We'll make frequent reference in this manual to dialogs. A dialog is simply a pop-up window into which you can enter information."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:438(para)
|
|
msgid "We recommend you enter your personal information when GRAMPS prompts you for it. GRAMPS uses this information strictly so it can create valid GEDCOM output files (which require information about the files' creator). If you wish, you can choose not to supply this information, but be aware that unless and until you do, any GEDCOM files you export will not be valid."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:446(title)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS Getting Started Window: Researcher Information"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:455(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Researcher Information Window."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:462(title)
|
|
msgid "Entering personal information"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:464(para)
|
|
msgid "This information can be entered at any time in the Preferences dialog, under the Database/Researcher Information category."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:472(title)
|
|
msgid "Choosing a database"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:474(para)
|
|
msgid "If GRAMPS is started without a database selected, the initial screen will have little functionality. Most operations will not be available. To load a database, select either <guibutton>New</guibutton> to create a new database, or <guibutton>Open</guibutton> to open an existing database. GRAMPS keeps track of your recently opened databases, and these can be selected by clicking on the arrow next to the <guibutton>Open</guibutton> button and choosing from the drop down menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:484(title)
|
|
msgid "Initial Window"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:493(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Initial Window."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:503(title)
|
|
msgid "Obtaining Help"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:505(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS has a <menuchoice><guimenu>Help</guimenu></menuchoice> menu that you can consult at any time. It includes the following items:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:512(term)
|
|
msgid "User manual"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:515(para)
|
|
msgid "An electronic version of the manual that you can access while you work in GRAMPS."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:521(term)
|
|
msgid "FAQ"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:524(para)
|
|
msgid "A list of Frequently Asked Questions about GRAMPS."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:529(term)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS home page"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:532(para)
|
|
msgid "A link to the GRAMPS' project web site."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:537(term)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS mailing lists"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:540(para)
|
|
msgid "Gives you direct access to GRAMPS' mailing list archives."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:546(term)
|
|
msgid "Report a bug"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:549(para)
|
|
msgid "Choose this item to file a bug report in our bug tracking system. (Remember, GRAMPS is a living project. We want to know about any problems you encounter so we can work to solve them for everyone's benefit.)"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:557(term)
|
|
msgid "Show plugin status"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:560(para)
|
|
msgid "Use this item to display the status of any plugins you may have added."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:566(term)
|
|
msgid "Open example database"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:569(para)
|
|
msgid "Select this item to load the example database that is included in your GRAMPS package. This database is composed of fictitious people and serves as a useful example for learning how to work with GRAMPS."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:580(title)
|
|
msgid "Main Window"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:582(para)
|
|
msgid "When you open a database (either existing or new), the following window is displayed:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:588(title)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS Main Window"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:602(para)
|
|
msgid "The main GRAMPS window contains the following elements:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:606(term)
|
|
msgid "Menubar"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:609(para)
|
|
msgid "The menubar is located at the very top of the window (right below the window title) and provides access to all the features of GRAMPS."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:616(term) gramps-manual.xml:6400(guilabel)
|
|
msgid "Toolbar"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:619(para)
|
|
msgid "The toolbar is located right below the menubar. It gives you access to the most frequently used functions of GRAMPS. You can set options that control how it appears by going to <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guisubmenu>Preferences</guisubmenu></menuchoice>. You can also hide it entirely by going to <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guisubmenu>Toolbar</guisubmenu></menuchoice>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:635(term)
|
|
msgid "Progress Bar"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:638(para)
|
|
msgid "The Progress Bar is located in the lower left corner of the GRAMPS window. It displays the progress of time consuming operations, such as opening and saving large data bases, importing and exporting to other formats, generating web sites, etc. When you are not doing these types of operations, the Progress Bar is blank."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:648(term)
|
|
msgid "Status Bar"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:651(para)
|
|
msgid "The Status Bar is located to the right of the Progress Bar, on the very bottom of the GRAMPS window. It displays information about current GRAMPS activity and contextual information about the selected items. The behavior of the Status Bar can be adjusted in the Preferences dialog, which can be found by selecting <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guisubmenu>Preferences</guisubmenu></menuchoice>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:664(term)
|
|
msgid "Display area"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:667(para)
|
|
msgid "The largest area in the center of the GRAMPS window is the display area. What it displays depends on the currently selected View. We'll discuss Views in detail below."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:677(title)
|
|
msgid "Views"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:679(para)
|
|
msgid "Genealogical information is very broad and can be extremely detailed. Displaying it poses a challenge that GRAMPS takes on by dividing and organizing the information into a series of Views. Each View displays a portion of the total information, selected according to a particular category. This will become clearer as we explore the nine different Views, listed below:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:688(para)
|
|
msgid "People"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:690(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays the list of all people in the database"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:694(para)
|
|
msgid "Relationships"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:696(para)
|
|
msgid "Shows the relationships between the selected person and other people. This includes parents, spouses, and children"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:701(para)
|
|
msgid "Family List"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:703(para)
|
|
msgid "Shows the list of all families in the database"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:707(para) gramps-manual.xml:1101(title) gramps-manual.xml:1115(title)
|
|
msgid "Pedigree View"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:709(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays a graphical ancestor tree for the selected person"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:714(para) gramps-manual.xml:2506(term) gramps-manual.xml:3260(term)
|
|
msgid "Events"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:716(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays the list of all events in the database"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:720(para) gramps-manual.xml:1250(title) gramps-manual.xml:1272(title)
|
|
msgid "Sources View"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:722(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays the list of all sources in the database"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:726(para) gramps-manual.xml:1294(title) gramps-manual.xml:1320(title)
|
|
msgid "Places View"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:728(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays the list of all places in the database"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:732(para) gramps-manual.xml:1342(title) gramps-manual.xml:1359(title)
|
|
msgid "Media View"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:734(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays the list of all media objects in the database"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:738(para)
|
|
msgid "Repositories"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:740(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays the list of all repositories in the database."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:744(para)
|
|
msgid "Before we launch into a description of each View, let's first explain how to switch between Views."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:750(title)
|
|
msgid "Switching Views and Viewing Modes"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:752(para)
|
|
msgid "As mentioned above there are six different Views. In addition, there are two different Viewing Modes. You can tell at a glance which Viewing Mode you are in: If you see icons listed vertically in a sidebar at the left of the window, you are in the Sidebar Viewing Mode. If instead you see a series of \"notebook tabs\" (labeled People, Family, Pedigree, Sources, Places, Media) that run horizontally across the window, then you are in the Tabbed Viewing Mode. You can switch from one Viewing Mode to another by selecting <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Sidebar</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the Sidebar menu item."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:765(para)
|
|
msgid "If you're in the Sidebar Viewing Mode, you can select the View you want by clicking one of the sidebar icons."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:771(title)
|
|
msgid "Sidebar Viewing Mode"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:781(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows sidebar viewing mode."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:789(para)
|
|
msgid "If you're in the Tabbed Viewing Mode, you can select the View you want by clicking the corresponding notebook tab."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:795(title)
|
|
msgid "Tabbed Viewing Mode"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:805(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows tabbed viewing mode."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:817(title)
|
|
msgid "People View"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:819(para)
|
|
msgid "When GRAMPS first opens a database, it displays the People View (<xref linkend=\"side-nofilt-fig\"/> and <xref linkend=\"noside-nofilt-fig\"/>). This view lists all the people stored in the database."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:824(para)
|
|
msgid "You'll note that people are grouped according to their family names. To the left of each family name is an arrow. Clicking it once will reveal the entire list of people sharing that name. Clicking the arrow again will \"roll up\" the list and show only the family name."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:830(para)
|
|
msgid "By default, the People View, displays the following columns: <guilabel>Names</guilabel>, GRAMPS <guilabel>ID</guilabel> numbers, <guilabel>Gender</guilabel>, and their <guilabel>Birth</guilabel> and <guilabel>Death dates</guilabel>. You can add or remove columns to and from the display by calling up the <guilabel>Column Editor</guilabel> dialog (<menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Column Editor</guimenuitem></menuchoice>) and checking or unchecking the boxes listed. You can also change the position of a column in People View by clicking and dragging it to a new position in the Editor. Once you have made the changes you want, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to exit the Editor and see your changes in the People View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:846(title) gramps-manual.xml:6434(term)
|
|
msgid "Column Editor"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:848(para)
|
|
msgid "The Column Editor is available in all Views and works the same way in each."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:855(title)
|
|
msgid "Column Editor Dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:865(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows column editor dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:874(title)
|
|
msgid "Filters"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:876(para)
|
|
msgid "Genealogical databases can contain information on many people, families, places, and objects. It's therefore possible for a View to contain a long list of data that's difficult to work with. GRAMPS gives you two different means for controlling this condition by allowing you to filter a list to a more manageable size. These methods are Search and Filtering."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:883(para)
|
|
msgid "Search is a simple but fast method of searching the columns displayed on the screen. Typing the characters into the Search box and clicking the Find button will display only lines that match the text."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:888(para)
|
|
msgid "Alternatively, you can enable the Filter sidebar, which will be displayed on the right hand side of the display. When the filter sidebar is displayed, the Search bar is not displayed. The Filter side bar allows you to interactive build a set of filter rules that can be applied to the display. The filter is applied based on the rules and the data, not on the screen display."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:898(title)
|
|
msgid "Filter Controls Displayed"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:908(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows filter controls."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:916(para)
|
|
msgid "When GRAMPS opens a database, no filtering is in effect. In People View, for example, all people in the database are listed by default."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:925(title)
|
|
msgid "Relationships View"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:927(para)
|
|
msgid "The Relationships View displays the family relationships of a selected person that we call the Active person. Specifically, it shows his or her parents, spouses, and children."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:931(para)
|
|
msgid "The Relationships View is designed to allow for quick navigation. You can quickly change the selected person simply by clicking the name of any person listed on the page. Each name is actually a hypertext link, similar to a web page."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:939(title)
|
|
msgid "Relationsihps View"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:949(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Relationships View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:957(para)
|
|
msgid "The Relationships View displays the following sections:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:961(term)
|
|
msgid "Active person"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:964(para)
|
|
msgid "At the top of the screen, name, ID, birth, and death information of the active person is displayed. If a photo of the person is available, it is show on the right hand side. Next to the person's name is a symbol indicating gender, and an Edit button. Clicking the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button will allow you to edit all of the person's individual information in an Edit Person dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:975(term)
|
|
msgid "Parents"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:978(para)
|
|
msgid "The next sections display the person's parents and siblings. Since it is possible to have multiple sets of parents, it is possible to have several Parents sections. You can control how much information is displayed by using the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu. The view menu allows you to show or hide details (the birth and death information) and to show or hide siblings. Next to each person listed is an <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button, which will allow you to edit all the details of that particular person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:988(para)
|
|
msgid "You may add, edit, or delete family information using the buttons next to the Parents label. You can add a set of parents by either selecting the Add button (the first button) or the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button (the second button). The <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button will create a new family with the active person listed as a child. The <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button will allow you to choose from a list of existing families, and then add the person as a child to that family."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:999(para)
|
|
msgid "If you are not careful, it is possible to create multiple families with the same parents. This is rarely what the user wants to do. If you attempt to add a new family that has the same parents as an existing family, GRAMPS will issue a warning dialog. If you get this dialog, you should probably Cancel the edit, and then use the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button to select the existing family."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1012(term)
|
|
msgid "Family"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1015(para)
|
|
msgid "Similar to the Parents section is the Family section, which displays families where the person is a parent. Because it is possible to have mulitple familes, it is possible to have multiple Family sections. Each family section displays the spouse and any children."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1022(para)
|
|
msgid "We use the term <emphasis>spouse</emphasis> for sake of simplicity. However, please note that <emphasis>spouse</emphasis> may in fact be a domestic partner, a partner in a civil union, or various other similar relationships between two people. <emphasis>Spouse</emphasis> relationships are not required to be only between a male and female."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1031(para)
|
|
msgid "You may add, edit, or delete family information using the buttons next to the Family label. You can add a spouse by clicking the Add button (the first button), which will create a new family with the active person listed as a father or mother. Selecting the Edit button will allow you to edit the displayed family. Clicking the Delete button will remove the person from the displayed family."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1040(para)
|
|
msgid "Removing a person from a family does not delete the family. The person is removed as the father or mother, and any other relationships in the family continue to exist."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1046(para)
|
|
msgid "We use the terms <emphasis>father</emphasis> and <emphasis>mother</emphasis> for the sake of simplicity. Even if there are no children in a family, the <emphasis>father</emphasis> and <emphasis>mother</emphasis> terminology is still used. In the case of male/male or female/female relationships, one of the <emphasis>father</emphasis> and <emphasis>mother</emphasis> labels should be considered to be convience labels, and should be considered as interchangable."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1064(title) gramps-manual.xml:1074(title)
|
|
msgid "Family List View"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1066(para)
|
|
msgid "The Family List View displays a list of all families in the database. From this view, you may add, edit, or delete families. The default display lists the ID, Father, Mother, and Relationship. Children cannot be displayed on the screen in this view."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1084(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Family List View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1091(para)
|
|
msgid "Unlike the Relationships View, clicking the Remove button in this view will remove the family from the database. All people will remain, but all relationships between the people in the family will be removed."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1103(para)
|
|
msgid "The Pedigree View displays a family tree of the Active person's ancestors. The Pedigree View shows up to four generations, depending on the size of the window. Each person is indicated by a box labeled with his or her name, birth and death information, and optionally an image if available. Two lines branch from each box. The top one shows the person's father and the bottom one the mother. Solid lines represent birth relations, while dashed lines represent non-birth relations such as adoption, step-parenthood, guardianship, etc."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1125(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Pedigree View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1133(para)
|
|
msgid "To the left of the Active person is a left arrow button. If the Active person has children, clicking this button expands a list of the Active person's children. Selecting one of the children makes that child the active Person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1138(para)
|
|
msgid "The appearance of the children's names in the menu differentiates the <emphasis>dead ends</emphasis> of the tree from the continuing branches. Children who have children themselves appear in the menu in the boldface and italic type, while children without children (<emphasis>dead ends</emphasis>) appear in a regular font. If the Active person has only one child, no menu will be displayed (since there is only one choice) and the child will become the Active person when the arrow button is clicked."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1150(title)
|
|
msgid "Children Menu"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1160(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Children Menu in Pedigree View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1168(para)
|
|
msgid "The right-hand side of the window shows two right arrow buttons. When the top button is clicked, the Father of the Active person becomes the Active person. Clicking the bottom button makes the Mother of the Active person the Active person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1176(title)
|
|
msgid "Personal Context Menu"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1187(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Context Menu in Pedigree View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1195(para)
|
|
msgid "Right-clicking on any person's box in the Pedigree View will bring up the \"context menu\". Among other useful items, the context menu has sub-menus listing <guilabel>Spouses</guilabel>, <guilabel>Siblings</guilabel>, <guilabel>Children</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Parents</guilabel> of that person. \"Greyed-out\" sub-menus indicate the absence of the data in the appropriate category. Similarly to the children menu above, Childrens' and Parents' menus distinguish continuing lines from dead ends."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1206(title) gramps-manual.xml:1217(title)
|
|
msgid "Events View"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1208(para)
|
|
msgid "New in version 2.2 is the inclusion of an Events View. Events can be shared between between multiple people and multiple families. The Events View lists the all the events recorded in the database. The default view displays the <guilabel>Description</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, <guilabel>Type</guilabel>, <guilabel>Date</guilabel>, <guilabel>Place</guilabel> and <guilabel>Cause</guilabel> of the event."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1227(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Events View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1234(para)
|
|
msgid "Because events can be shared, you should take the extra time to give each event a unique and meaningful description. This will help you find the correct event if you decide to share events."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1240(para)
|
|
msgid "The list of Events can be sorted in the usual manner, by clicking on the column heading. Clcking once sorts in ascending order, clicking again sorts in descending order. The <guilabel>Column Editor</guilabel> dialog can be used to add, remove and rearrange the displayed columns."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1252(para)
|
|
msgid "Sources View lists the sources of certain information stored in the database. These can include various documents (birth, death, and marriage certificates, etc.), books, films, journals, private diaries, - nearly anything that can provide genealogical evidence. GRAMPS gives you the option to provide a source for each event you record (births, deaths, marriages, etc.). The Source View lists the <guilabel>Title</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Author</guilabel> of the source, as well as any <guilabel>Publication</guilabel> information that may be associated with it."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1263(para)
|
|
msgid "The list of Sources can be sorted in the usual manner, by clicking on a column heading. Clicking once sorts in ascending order, clicking again sorts in descending order. The <guilabel>Column Editor</guilabel> dialog can be used to add, remove and rearrange the displayed columns."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1282(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Sources View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1296(para)
|
|
msgid "The Places View lists the geographical places in which the events of the database took place. These could be places of birth, death, and marriages of people, as well as their home, employment, education addresses, or any other conceivable reference to the geographical location. The Places View lists the places' <guilabel>Name</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, <guilabel>Church Parish</guilabel>, <guilabel>City</guilabel>, <guilabel>County</guilabel>, <guilabel>State</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Country</guilabel>. All of these columns can be used for sorting by the usual sorting rules. The <guilabel>Column Editor</guilabel> dialog may be used to add, remove and rearrange the displayed columns."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1309(para)
|
|
msgid "If a place has been highlighted, you may select the <guibutton>Google Maps</guibutton> button to attempt to display the place in a web browser. Your default web browser should open, attempting to use either the longitude and lattitude coordinates or the place name to display the location using the Google Maps web site. This feature is limited, and may not always produce the results you desire."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1330(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Places View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1344(para)
|
|
msgid "The Media View is a list of Media Objects used in the database. Media Objects are any files that relate somehow to the stored genealogical data. Technically, any file can be stored as a Media Object. Most frequently, these are images, audio files, animation files, etc. The list box on the bottom lists the <guilabel>Name</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, <guilabel>Type</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Path</guilabel> of the Media Object. The <guilabel>Column Editor</guilabel> dialog may be used to rearrange the displayed columns, which obey usual sorting rules. The top part of the GRAMPS window shows a preview (if available) and information about the Media Object."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1369(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Media View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1379(title) gramps-manual.xml:1388(title)
|
|
msgid "Repositories View"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1381(para)
|
|
msgid "Version 2.2 adds support for Repositories. A repository can be thought of as a collection of sources. Each source in the database can reference a repository (such as a library) in which it belongs. The functionality of the Repositories View is similar to the other views."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1398(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Repositories View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1408(title)
|
|
msgid "Usage"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1410(para)
|
|
msgid "Now we turn to a detailed exploration of the day-to-day use of GRAMPS. First, we should point out that GRAMPS often offers more than one way to do the same task. We'll try to point out some of these alternatives where appropriate."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1418(title)
|
|
msgid "Starting a New Database"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1420(para)
|
|
msgid "To start a new database, choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>New</guimenuitem></menuchoice> or select the <guibutton>New</guibutton> button from the toolbar. You will then be asked to give the new database a name."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1428(title)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS databases"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1430(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS stores your data in a Berkeley database, sometimes known as BSDDB. These files have \".grdb\" as their default extension. The extension is automatically added to your filename."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1439(title)
|
|
msgid "Opening a Database"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1441(para)
|
|
msgid "To open a database, either choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Open</guimenuitem></menuchoice> or click the <guibutton>Open</guibutton> button on the Toolbar. The <guilabel>Open database</guilabel> dialog will appear and you'll see a list of files. If you don't see the file you're looking for, make sure the All files filter is selected. (This dialog has a \"filetype\" filter, meaning it may only be showing files that have a certain extension.)"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1452(para)
|
|
msgid "To open a recently accessed database, choose either <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Open Recent</guimenuitem></menuchoice> or the down arrow next to the <guibutton>Open</guibutton> button and select the filename from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1460(para)
|
|
msgid "If you do not have \"write permissions\" for the selected database, it will be opened in a Read Only mode. In this mode, the data may be viewed, but no changes will be made to the database. To indicate this mode, the title of the main window will be appended with <guilabel>(Read Only)</guilabel> text."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1466(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS allows you to open certain databases that have not been saved in GRAMPS' own file format. These include XML and GEDCOM databases. But you should be aware that if the XML or GEDCOM database is relatively large, you may encounter some performance problems. These can be avoided by creating a new GRAMPS database and importing your XML/GEDCOM data into it."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1474(title)
|
|
msgid "Opening XML and GEDCOM databases"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1476(para)
|
|
msgid "XML and GEDCOM databases require all data to be held in memory. GRAMPS' native grdb format does not. Thus, a database with a grdb format can access data quicker and more efficiently."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1482(title)
|
|
msgid "GEDCOM Editing"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1484(para)
|
|
msgid "Please keep in mind that some information in a GEDCOM file may be lost during import into GRAMPS. Simply opening and viewing the file will not change it. However, if any changes were made and they were not abandoned upon exit, exiting GRAMPS will save the data, with possible data loss."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1495(title)
|
|
msgid "Saving Changes to Your Database"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1497(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS saves your changes as soon as you apply them. This means, for example, that any time you click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> when using GRAMPS, your changes are immediately recorded and saved. There is no separate \"save\" command (although there is a \"save as\" command that we'll discuss later.)"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1503(para)
|
|
msgid "You can undo changes you've made by selecting <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Undo</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. If you select this command repeatedly, your most recent changes will be undone one at a time. To roll back multple commands at a time, you can using the <guilabel>Undo History</guilabel> dialog available from the <guilabel>Edit</guilabel> menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1512(para)
|
|
msgid "If you want to return your database to the way it was when you opened it, select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Abandon changes and quit</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. (This is just like quitting without saving in other programs.)"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1520(para)
|
|
msgid "If you would like to save your database under a different name, you can do so by choosing <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Save as...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> and specifying the name (and, optionally, the format) of your new database. Note that \"Save as\" will allow you to continue editing the newly saved database. If this is not what you want to do, you may wish to use the \"Export\" command instead."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1534(title)
|
|
msgid "Importing Data"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1536(para)
|
|
msgid "Importing allows you to bring data from other genealogy programs into a GRAMPS database. Currently, GRAMPS can import data from the following formats:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1542(para)
|
|
msgid "Another GRAMPS database (having the \"grdb\" file extension),"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1547(para)
|
|
msgid "GEDCOM"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1551(para) gramps-manual.xml:1606(term)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS XML"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1555(para) gramps-manual.xml:1627(term)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS package"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1559(para) gramps-manual.xml:1909(term)
|
|
msgid "GeneWeb"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1564(title)
|
|
msgid "Importing vs. opening"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1566(para)
|
|
msgid "Please recognize that importing a database is different from opening a database. When you import, you are actually bringing data from one database into a GRAMPS database. When you open a file, you are editing your original file."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1572(para)
|
|
msgid "To import data, select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guisubmenu>Import</guisubmenu></menuchoice>. The <guilabel>Import database</guilabel> dialog will open, asking you to specify the file you wish to import."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1580(title)
|
|
msgid "Data loss with some formats"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1582(para)
|
|
msgid "It is important to note that the importing process is not perfect for GEDCOM and GeneWeb databases. There is a chance that some of the data in these databases will not be imported into GRAMPS."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1588(para)
|
|
msgid "The GRAMPS database (grdb), GRAMPS XML, and GRAMPS package are all native GRAMPS formats. There is no risk of information loss when import or exporting to these formats."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1594(term)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS database (grdb)"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1597(para)
|
|
msgid "The native GRAMPS database format is a specific form of Berkeley database (BSDDB) with a special structure of data tables. This format is binary and architecture-dependent. It is very quick and efficient, but not generally portable across computers with different binary architecture (e.g. i386 vs alpha)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1609(para)
|
|
msgid "The GRAMPS XML file was the default format for older versions of GRAMPS. Unlike the grdb format, it is architecture independent and human-readable. The database may also have references to non-local (external) media objects, therefore it is not guaranteed to be completely portable. The GRAMPS XML database is created by saving ( <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Save As...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> ) or exporting ( <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Export...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> ) data in that format"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1630(para)
|
|
msgid "The GRAMPS package is a compressed archive containing the GRAMPS XML file and all media objects (images, sound files, etc.) to which the database refers. Because it contains all the media objects, this format is completely portable. The GRAMPS package is created by exporting ( <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Export...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> ) data in that format."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1643(para)
|
|
msgid "If you import information from another GRAMPS database or GRAMPS XML database, you will see the progress of the operation in the progress bar of GRAMPS' main window."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1651(title)
|
|
msgid "Exporting Data"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1653(para)
|
|
msgid "Exporting allows you to share any portion of your GRAMPS database with other researchers as well as to enable you to transfer your data to another computer. Currently, GRAMPS can export data to the following formats: GRAMPS database (grdb), GRAMPS XML, GEDCOM, GRAMPS package, Web Family Tree, and GeneWeb."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1660(title)
|
|
msgid "Export is saving a copy"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1662(para)
|
|
msgid "When you export, you are saving a copy of the currently opened database. Exporting creates another file with a copy of your data. Note that the database that remains opened in your GRAMPS window is NOT the file saved by your export. Additional editing of the currently opened database will not alter the copy produced by the export."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1669(para)
|
|
msgid "To export data, choose <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guimenuitem>Export</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. This will bring up the <guilabel>Export</guilabel> assistant. Its pages will guide you through the format selection (see <xref linkend=\"export-druid-fig\"/>), file selection, and format specific export options (see <xref linkend=\"gedcom-export-fig\"/>). After a final confirmation page, the export will be performed according to the choices you have made. At any time, you can click the <guibutton>Back</guibutton> and revise any selection, and then go forward to redo the export."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1685(title)
|
|
msgid "Export assistant: format selection"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1695(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows format selection page of an Export assistant"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1703(title)
|
|
msgid "Exporting into the GEDCOM format"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1705(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS allows you to export a database into the common GEDCOM format. It provides options that allow you to fine tune your export (see <xref linkend=\"gedcom-export-fig\"/>)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1711(term)
|
|
msgid "Encoding"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1714(para)
|
|
msgid "Since different languages use different characters, it is important to tell a GEDCOM file what character set is used. The two formats traditionally accepted are ASCII and ANSEL. Since all ASCII characters are valid ANSEL characters, GRAMPS does not provide an option for ASCII."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1720(para)
|
|
msgid "Because ANSEL is not commonly used, some genealogy programs will accept ANSI (more commonly know as ISO-8859-1) and Unicode character sets. Only select ANSI or Unicode if you know any program that attempts to read the GEDCOM file will understand these character sets."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1729(term)
|
|
msgid "Filter"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1732(para)
|
|
msgid "The filter allows you to export a limited amount of data, based on the criteria you select."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1738(term)
|
|
msgid "Target"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1741(para)
|
|
msgid "While GEDCOM is a standard, not every program implements it in the same way. This can lead to data loss. GRAMPS can reduce the data loss in some cases. You can tell GRAMPS what program is the target, and GRAMPS will customize the exported file for that program. If your program is not listed, choose the \"GEDCOM 5.5 Standard\"."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1751(term)
|
|
msgid "Copyright"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1754(para)
|
|
msgid "Allows you to select a statement to describe your Copyright claim."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1760(term)
|
|
msgid "No not include records marked private"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1763(para)
|
|
msgid "Check this box to prevent private records from being included in the exported file."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1769(term)
|
|
msgid "Restrict data on living people"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1772(para)
|
|
msgid "Check this box to limit the information exported for living people. This means that all information concerning their birth, death, addresses, significant events, etc., will be omitted in the exported GEDCOM file. If you choose this option, you will be given additional options to limit further the data on living people. For example, you can choose to substitute the word \"Living\" for the first name; you can exclude notes; and you can exclude sources for living people."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1781(para)
|
|
msgid "Sometimes, it is not always obvious from the data if someone is actually alive. GRAMPS uses an advanced algorithm to try to determine if a person could still be alive. Remember, GRAMPS is making its best guess, and it may not always be able to guess correctly all the time. Please double check your data."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1791(term)
|
|
msgid "Reference images from path"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1794(para)
|
|
msgid "Check this box to tell GRAMPS to use the specific path for your images when writing image references in GEDCOM."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1797(para)
|
|
msgid "This option allows specify where your image files are located. This is useful when you are transfering your GEDCOM file from one computer to another. It tells the program that is importing the data where your images are."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1808(title)
|
|
msgid "Export assistant: GEDCOM options"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1818(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows GEDCOM options page of an Export druid"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1828(title)
|
|
msgid "Export into GRAMPS formats"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1832(term)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS database (grdb) export"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1835(para)
|
|
msgid "Exporting to the GRAMPS native format will simply make a copy of your data under another name. Exporting to this format can also be useful if you have directly opened an XML or GEDCOM file and would like to save it as the grdb file."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1843(term)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS XML database export"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1846(para)
|
|
msgid "Exporting into GRAMPS XML format will produce a database compatible with the previous versions of GRAMPS. As XML is a text-based human-readable format, you may also use it to take a look at your data."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1854(term)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS package export"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1857(para)
|
|
msgid "Exporting to the GRAMPS package format will create a compressed file that contains the database and copies of all associated media files. This is useful if you want to move your database to another computer or to share it with someone."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1865(term)
|
|
msgid "Export to CD"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1868(para)
|
|
msgid "Exporting to CD will prepare your database and copies of all media object files for recording onto a CD. To actually burn the CD, you will need to go to the GNOME <guilabel>burn:///</guilabel> location, which can be accessed by navigating through Nautilus: After exporting to CD, select <menuchoice><guimenu>Go</guimenu><guisubmenu>CD Creator</guisubmenu></menuchoice> in the Nautilus menu. Your database directory will show up. To burn it to the CD, click the CD icon on the Nautilus toolbar, or select <menuchoice><guimenu>File</guimenu><guisubmenu>Write to CD</guisubmenu></menuchoice> in the Nautilus menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1888(para)
|
|
msgid "If a media file is not found during export, you will see the same <guilabel>Missing Media</guilabel> dialog you encounter with GEDCOM export."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1894(title)
|
|
msgid "Export into other formats"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1898(term)
|
|
msgid "Web Family Tree"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1901(para)
|
|
msgid "Exporting to Web Family Tree will create a text file that can be used by the Web Family Tree program. Export options include filter selection and the ability to limit data on living people to that of their family ties."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1912(para)
|
|
msgid "Exporting to GeneWeb will save a copy of your data into a popular web genealogy format. To find out more about GeneWeb and its format, visit <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://cristal.inria.fr/~ddr/GeneWeb/en/\">http://cristal.inria.fr/~ddr/GeneWeb/en/</ulink>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1920(term)
|
|
msgid "vCalendar and vCard"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1923(para)
|
|
msgid "Exporting to vCalendar or vCard will save information in a format used in many calendaring and addressbook applications, sometimes called PIM for Personal Information Manager."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1935(title)
|
|
msgid "Entering and Editing Data: Quick Start Overview"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1937(para)
|
|
msgid "This section is designed to give you the basic knowledge necessary to start putting your genealogical information into GRAMPS. It will explain how to enter people into the database and how to specify their family relationships. (A more detailed explanation will follow in the section entitled <xref linkend=\"gramps-edit-complete\"/>.)"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1943(para)
|
|
msgid "First, let's identify the types of information you can enter into your GRAMPS database. These include:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1948(para)
|
|
msgid "Personal information about an individual (names, addresses, birth and death dates, etc.)"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1953(para)
|
|
msgid "Information about an individual's relationships (marriages, divorces, civil unions, etc.)"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1958(para)
|
|
msgid "Information about an individual's parents and children"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1962(para)
|
|
msgid "Sources that document your research"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1967(title)
|
|
msgid "Keybindings"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1969(para)
|
|
msgid "In addition to interacting with GRAMPS through menu items and buttons, you can use its extensive set of \"keybindings.\" For more information, see <xref linkend=\"append-keybind\"/>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1974(para)
|
|
msgid "Now let's take a quick look at how you can enter and edit these various types of information."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1980(title)
|
|
msgid "To Add or Edit a Person"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1982(para)
|
|
msgid "There are multiple ways to add a person to the database. We will cover some of them as we proceed. The simplest way to enter a person to add them from the People View. While you are in the People View (<xref linkend=\"side-nofilt-fig\"/>), click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> on the toolbar. Enter any data you know about this person into the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog (see <xref linkend=\"edit-pers-fig\"/> for details)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1990(para)
|
|
msgid "To edit information about a person already present in the database, select the person from the People View and click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button on the toolbar."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1995(title)
|
|
msgid "Alternate ways of adding or editing a person from the People View"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:1998(para)
|
|
msgid "You can also use <guilabel>Add...</guilabel> and <guilabel>Edit...</guilabel> menu items available under <guimenu>Edit</guimenu>. Or you can right-click on the person and select <guilabel>Add...</guilabel> or <guilabel>Edit...</guilabel> from the context menu that pops up."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2005(para)
|
|
msgid "People can also be added to the database in the Relationships View, Edit Family dialog, and other places where it makes sense."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2013(title)
|
|
msgid "To Specify a Relationship"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2015(para)
|
|
msgid "There are two primary ways to specify relationships between people - using the Relationships View and using the Edit Family dialog from the Family List View. The Family List is usually used to build all the relationships within a single family at a time. The Relationships View is usually used to build multiple relationships to a single person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2022(para)
|
|
msgid "To specify a new relationship to the selected person, switch to the Relationships View (<xref linkend=\"family-fig\"/>) and you'll see this individual indicated as the \"Active person\". Next to the <guilabel>Family</guilabel> label is a <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button (typically represented by a <guibutton>+</guibutton> sign). Clicking the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button will display the Edit Family dialog with the selected person set as either the father or the mother."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2032(title)
|
|
msgid "Editing a family"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2041(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Editing a family."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2047(para)
|
|
msgid "Now a question: Does the person who will form the relationship with the Active person already exist in the database? If yes, click the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button to the other person. You'll then be able to browse through the list of people in the database to select the one you want. If not, click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button. This will allow you to add a new person to the database and to specify the relationship this person has to the Active person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2056(title)
|
|
msgid "Selecting a person"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2065(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Selecting a person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2072(title)
|
|
msgid "Filtering"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2074(para)
|
|
msgid "By default, GRAMPS filters the displayed list to show only those people who could theoretically have a relationship with the Active Person. That is, GRAMPS only shows those people whose birth dates and death dates fit within the lifetime of the Active Person. If you wish, you can add a person to the list by clicking the <guibutton>+</guibutton> button. To completely override the filter and display all people from the database, check the <guilabel>Show all</guilabel> box."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2084(para)
|
|
msgid "To edit an existing relationship from the Relationships View, click on the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button next to corresponding Family entry. If there is more than one relationship in the list, you can select the spouse or partner you want by clicking the corresponding <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button next to the relationship."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2091(para)
|
|
msgid "To specify a new relationship in the Family List View, click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button on the toolbar, and an empty Edit Family dialog will open. At this point, you can add people to the family."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2100(title)
|
|
msgid "To Specify Parents"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2102(para)
|
|
msgid "You can specify Active person's parents in the Relationship View(<xref linkend=\"family-fig\"/>). A little care is required to prevent the creation of duplicate families. If you wish to add the active person to an already existing family, you should click the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button. If the family including the parents does not already exist, you should click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2110(para)
|
|
msgid "If you click on the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button, you are presented with the Select Family dialog. This will allow you to select the existing family, and then the Active person will be added as a child to the family."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2116(title)
|
|
msgid "Selecting a family"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2126(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Selecting a family."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2132(para)
|
|
msgid "If you click on the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button, a new Edit Family dialog is presented with the Active person listed a child of the new family. You can add the parents to the family by either adding new people as the parents or selecting existing people as the parents."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2139(para)
|
|
msgid "If you create a new family and select parents that are already in an existing family, GRAMPS will issue a warning message. If you proceed by saving the new famiy, you will have a duplicate family."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2145(title)
|
|
msgid "Duplicate family warning"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2155(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Duplicate family warning."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2162(para)
|
|
msgid "You can also specify the parents of a person in the Family List View. If the family already exists, click on the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button on the tool bar and add the person as a child when the Edit Family dialog is displayed. If the family does not already exist, click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button to create a new family, and add the appropriate parents and children."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2174(title)
|
|
msgid "To Specify Children"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2176(para)
|
|
msgid "Adding children to a relationship is done through a similar proceedure. From the Relationships View or the Family List View, select the existing family or create a new family. Children can be added by selecting the Add button or Select button to the right of the child list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2182(para)
|
|
msgid "Clicking the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button will display the Edit Person dialog, allowing you to enter a new person. Clicking on the <guibutton>Select</guibutton> button, will allow you to select an existing person from a list. By default, the child is added with a the relationship type of birth to both parents."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2188(para)
|
|
msgid "If you wish to change the parent/child relationship from the default setting of birth, select the child and click on the Edit button. This will display the Edit Child Reference dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2193(title)
|
|
msgid "Child Reference Editor"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2203(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Child Reference Editor."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2213(title)
|
|
msgid "Adding Photos and Other Media Objects"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2215(para)
|
|
msgid "You can add photos and other media objects to individual people, events, sources, and places. You can also add images that might not be limited to a single person or event (for example, group family photos)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2220(para)
|
|
msgid "If you want to add an image to a single person, switch to the People View (<xref linkend=\"side-nofilt-fig\"/>), select a person, and then click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the toolbar. This will bring up the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog (<xref linkend=\"edit-pers-fig\"/>). Next, select the <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab, and click the <guibutton>+</guibutton> button to call up the <guilabel>Select a media object</guilabel> dialog. Type a filename or browse to find the image file you want and then provide a title for that image. Keep adding images until you are done."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2231(para)
|
|
msgid "To add images related to a relationship (for example, a marriage), switch to the Family View (<xref linkend=\"family-fig\"/>) and double-click on the Spouse box. This calls up the <guilabel>Marriage/Relationship editor</guilabel> dialog. Select the <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab and click the <guibutton>+</guibutton> button to add an image."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2238(para)
|
|
msgid "To add images related to a source or a place, first switch to the Source View (<xref linkend=\"sources-fig\"/>) or Place View (<xref linkend=\"places-fig\"/>). Select the source or place you want and then either double-click on it or click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the toolbar. Select the <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab and click the <guibutton>+</guibutton> button to add an image."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2245(para)
|
|
msgid "Finally, to add images that you want to include in the database, but hare are not limited to any particular person, relationship, source or place, switch to the Media View (<xref linkend=\"media-fig\"/>). Then click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> icon on the toolbar to add an image. If you have already added any images to any individual galleries, you will also find them listed in the Media View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2254(title)
|
|
msgid "Alternate way of adding images to galleries"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2256(para)
|
|
msgid "An image can always be added to any gallery by using drag-and-drop. Items can be dragged from the Media View, any gallery, the desktop, the file manager or a web browser and dropped on the target gallery, adding the image to the gallery."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2262(para)
|
|
msgid "In any gallery, you can also use the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> to edit image information and the <guibutton>-</guibutton> button and to remove the image reference from that gallery."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2267(title)
|
|
msgid "Removing an image from a gallery"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2269(para)
|
|
msgid "Removing a media object from a gallery does not remove the image from the database. To completely remove the image from the database, delete it from Media View by first selecting it and then clicking the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> icon on the toolbar."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2280(title)
|
|
msgid "To Edit Sources and Places"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2282(para)
|
|
msgid "To add a source or a place to the database, switch to the appropriate Source View (<xref linkend=\"sources-fig\"/>) or Place View (<xref linkend=\"places-fig\"/>). Then click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> icon on the toolbar to add a source/place. Enter the information into the <guilabel>Source Editor</guilabel> (or <guilabel>Place Editor</guilabel>) dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2289(para)
|
|
msgid "To edit information about sources and places already present in the database, switch to the appropriate view, select an entry you would like to view/modify, and then click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the toolbar. Alternatively, you may double-click on the entry to edit it."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2300(title)
|
|
msgid "Enterng and Editing Data: Complete Description"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2302(para)
|
|
msgid "The previous section offered you a quick overview of how to enter and edit data in GRAMPS. This section continues that discussion in much greater detail."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2306(para)
|
|
msgid "As we have seen above, GRAMPS offers you a series of Views. Each of these Views gives you opportunities to enter and edit information. In fact, you can often get to the same information from different Views."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2311(para)
|
|
msgid "In GRAMPS, information is entered and edited through what we call dialogs. Since we use that term frequently, we should define what we mean by it:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2315(para)
|
|
msgid "A dialog is a pop-up window that provides one or more forms for entering and editing data that fits a certain category. Examples in GRAMPS include the Edit Person dialog and the Marriage/Relationship dialog, among many others."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2320(para)
|
|
msgid "A dialog often includes a series of \"notebook tabs\" that group the information into subcategories. For example, the Edit Person dialog has notebook tabs for subcategories such as Events, Attributes, Addresses, and Notes, among others."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2326(title)
|
|
msgid "Add, Remove, and Edit buttons"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2328(para)
|
|
msgid "In most cases, GRAMPS uses a <guibutton>+</guibutton> to correspond to <guibutton>Add</guibutton>, a <guibutton>-</guibutton> correspond to <guibutton>Remove</guibutton>, and an icon of a pen on a sheet of paper to denote <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>. We will continue referring to the latter as the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button, while using <guibutton>+</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> to denote the two former buttons."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2340(title)
|
|
msgid "Editing Information About People"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2342(para)
|
|
msgid "Information about people is entered and edited through the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog. This dialog can be invoked from different Views in the following ways:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2348(term)
|
|
msgid "From the People View:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2353(para)
|
|
msgid "Double-click the name of the person whose data you would like to edit"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2358(para)
|
|
msgid "Select the name by single click and then click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button on the toolbar."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2363(para)
|
|
msgid "Select the name and then press <keycap>Enter</keycap>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2368(para)
|
|
msgid "Select <guimenuitem>Edit...</guimenuitem> from the <guisubmenu>Edit</guisubmenu> menu of GRAMPS"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2373(para)
|
|
msgid "Select <guimenuitem>Edit</guimenuitem> from the context menu that appears upon right-click on the name."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2382(term)
|
|
msgid "From the Relationships View:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2385(para)
|
|
msgid "To edit the active person's data, click on the Edit button next to the active person's name."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2391(term)
|
|
msgid "From the Pedigree View:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2394(para)
|
|
msgid "Double-click in the box having the name of the person whose data you want to edit."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2400(para)
|
|
msgid "In each of the above cases, the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog will appear:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2406(title)
|
|
msgid "Edit Person dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2416(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Edit Person dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2424(para)
|
|
msgid "The top of the window shows the name of the person whose data is being edited. Below this name are ten \"notebook tabs\" containing different categories of available information. Click any tab to view and edit its contents. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at the bottom will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window without applying any changes. If any data in any tabs were modified, an alert window will appear, prompting you to choose from the following options: close the dialog without saving changes, cancel the initial cancel request, or save the changes."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2437(para)
|
|
msgid "Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save changes to the database. There is no need for a Save operation, since all changes are immediate."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2443(para) gramps-manual.xml:3232(para) gramps-manual.xml:3442(para) gramps-manual.xml:3593(para) gramps-manual.xml:3775(para) gramps-manual.xml:3905(para)
|
|
msgid "If a tab label is in boldface type, this means it contains data. If not, it has no data."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2447(para)
|
|
msgid "The tabs reflect the following categories of personal data:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2452(term) gramps-manual.xml:3241(term) gramps-manual.xml:3451(term) gramps-manual.xml:3601(term) gramps-manual.xml:3784(term) gramps-manual.xml:3914(term) gramps-manual.xml:4079(guilabel) gramps-manual.xml:4208(guilabel) gramps-manual.xml:4319(guilabel) gramps-manual.xml:6235(guilabel) gramps-manual.xml:6322(guilabel)
|
|
msgid "General"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2454(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab contains general information about the person. This includes <guilabel>Given name</guilabel>, <guilabel>Family name</guilabel>, <guilabel>Family prefix</guilabel> (such as \"de\" or \"van\"), <guilabel>Suffix</guilabel> (e.g. Jr. or III), <guilabel>Title</guilabel> (e.g. Dr. or Rev.), <guilabel>Nickname</guilabel> (Bob for Robert), <guilabel>Type</guilabel> of the name (birth name, married name, etc.). Some of these (<guilabel>Family name</guilabel>, <guilabel>Type</guilabel>, and both <guilabel>Place</guilabel> fields), also provide \"autocompletion\" feature: as you type in these fields, a menu appears below the field containing database entries that match your partial input. This gives you a shortcut by letting you select an entry that already exists in the database rather than having to type it all out. You can select the entry using your mouse or using your arrow and <keycap>Enter</keycap> keys."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2472(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Edit</guilabel> (that is, the \"pen and paper\" icon) next to the <guilabel>Family name</guilabel> entry field invokes the <guilabel>Name Editor</guilabel> dialog. This dialog allows editing the preferred name in full detail (see <xref linkend=\"adv-an\"/>)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2478(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Gender</guilabel> menu offers the choice of person's gender : <guilabel>male</guilabel>, <guilabel>female</guilabel>, and <guilabel>unknown</guilabel>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2483(para)
|
|
msgid "The field <guilabel>ID</guilabel> displays the GRAMPS ID number which identifies the user in the database. This value helps you distiguish between people who have the same name. You may enter any unique value you want. If you do not provide a value, GRAMPS will automatically select a value for you."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2489(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Image</guilabel> area shows the first image available in the <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> of this person (if any exist)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2493(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Marker</guilabel> allows you to specify som basic information on the status of your research."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2496(para)
|
|
msgid "Finally, the <guilabel>Privacy</guilabel> buttons lets you mark whether or not the person's record is considered private."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2508(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Events</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit any events relevant to the person. The bottom part of the window lists all such events stored in the database. The top part shows the details of the currently selected event in the list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to add, modify, and remove an event record from the database. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when an event is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2524(term) gramps-manual.xml:4030(title)
|
|
msgid "Names"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2529(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Names</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit any alternate names the person may have. The bottom part of the window lists all alternate names for the person stored in the database. The top part shows the details of the currently selected name in the list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow the addition, modification, and removal of an alternate name from the database. Note that the Edit and - buttons become available only when an alternate name is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2541(title)
|
|
msgid "Edit Person dialog - Names"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2552(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Names Tab of Edit Person dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2558(para)
|
|
msgid "When you add a new name or edit an existing name, the <guilabel>Name Editor</guilabel> dialog is invoked. This dialog is described in the section below (see <xref linkend=\"adv-an\"/>)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2570(term) gramps-manual.xml:3279(term) gramps-manual.xml:3805(term) gramps-manual.xml:4159(title)
|
|
msgid "Attributes"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2573(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Attributes</guilabel> tab lets you view and assign attributes to the person. You have complete freedom to define and use attributes. For example, attributes might be assigned to describe the person's physical characteristics or personality traits."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2579(para)
|
|
msgid "Note that each attribute listed in the <guilabel>Attribute</guilabel> dialog consists of two parts: the Attribute itself and a Value associated with that Attribute. This so-called \"Parameter-Value\" pairing can help you organize and systematize your research. For example, if you define \"Hair color\" as an Attribute for a person, \"Hair Color\" will become a selectable Attribute for all other people. The Value of Hair Color for person A might be red, and brown for person B. In similar fashion, you might define an Attribute like \"Generosity\" and use the Value of \"Enormous\" to describe a particularly generous person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2591(para)
|
|
msgid "The bottom part of the dialog window displays the list of all Attributes stored in the database. The top part shows the details of the currently selected attribute in the list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, and remove an attribute record from the database. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when an attribute is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2604(title)
|
|
msgid "Edit Person dialog - Attributes"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2615(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Attributes Tab of Edit Person dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2629(term) gramps-manual.xml:4270(title)
|
|
msgid "Addresses"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2632(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Addresses</guilabel> tab lets you view and record the various addresses of the person. The bottom part of the window lists all addresses stored in the database. The top part shows the details of the currently selected address in the list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly add, modify, and remove an address record from the database. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when an address is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2643(para)
|
|
msgid "Some reports allow you to restrict data on living people. In particular, that option will omit their addresses."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2649(title)
|
|
msgid "Edit Person dialog - Addresses"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2660(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Addresses Tab of Edit Person dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2674(term) gramps-manual.xml:3299(term) gramps-manual.xml:3825(term)
|
|
msgid "Notes"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2680(title)
|
|
msgid "Edit Person dialog - Notes"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2691(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Notes Tab of Edit Person dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2699(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Notes</guilabel> tab provides a place to record various items about the person that do not fit neatly into other categories. To add a note or modify existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry field."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2704(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option lets you set the way the note will appear in reports and web pages. If you select \"Flowed,\" the text generated will have single spaces put in place of all multiple spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters. A blank line inserted between two blocks of text will signal a new paragraph; additional inserted lines will be ignored."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2712(para) gramps-manual.xml:3315(para)
|
|
msgid "If you select the Preformatted option, the text in reports and web pages will appear exactly as you enter it in the Notes dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2721(term) gramps-manual.xml:3324(term) gramps-manual.xml:3649(guilabel) gramps-manual.xml:3934(term) gramps-manual.xml:4116(guilabel) gramps-manual.xml:4227(guilabel) gramps-manual.xml:4337(guilabel)
|
|
msgid "Sources"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2727(title)
|
|
msgid "Edit Person dialog - Sources"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2738(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Sources Tab of Edit Person dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2747(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab allows you to view and document the sources for the information you collect. These might be general sources that do not describe a specific event, but which nevertheless yield information about the person. For example, if Aunt Martha's memoirs mention her great-grandson Paul, the researcher may assume that this Paul actually existed and cite Aunt Martha's memoirs as the source that justifies this assumption."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2757(para)
|
|
msgid "Sources which document specific events are best recorded as sources of the event (under the <guilabel>Events</guilabel> tab) instead of as a source of the person. The person's <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab is best used for any sources not specificly connected to any other data."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2764(para)
|
|
msgid "The central part displays the list of all source references stored in the database in relation to the person. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly add, modify, and remove a source reference to this person. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a source reference is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2776(term) gramps-manual.xml:3356(term) gramps-manual.xml:3501(term) gramps-manual.xml:3667(term)
|
|
msgid "Gallery"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2779(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab lets you view and store photos, videos, and other media objects that are associated with the person. The central part of the window lists all such media objects. Any object in the form of a valid image file will result in the display of a thumbnail view of the image. For other objects such as audio files, movie files, etc., a corresponding file type icon is displayed instead."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2788(para)
|
|
msgid "The first available image in the gallery will be also displayed in the <guilabel>Image</guilabel> area in the <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2793(para)
|
|
msgid "The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Select</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add a new image to the database, link to an image already stored in the database, modify an image, and remove a given media object from the person's gallery. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a media object is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2805(title)
|
|
msgid "Edit Person dialog - Gallery"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2816(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Gallery Tab of Edit Person dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2826(para)
|
|
msgid "Removing a media object from a person's gallery does not remove it from the database. It only removes the reference to that object from this person's record."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2836(term) gramps-manual.xml:3689(term)
|
|
msgid "Internet"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2839(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Internet</guilabel> tab displays Internet addresses relevant to the person. The bottom part lists all such Internet addresses and accompanying descriptions. The top part shows the details of the currently selected addresses in the list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, and remove an Internet address. The \"Go\" button (represented by an icon having a green arrow and yellow circle) opens your web browser and takes you directly to the highlighted page. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, <guibutton>-</guibutton>, and <guibutton>Go</guibutton> buttons become available only when an address is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2856(title)
|
|
msgid "Edit Person dialog - Internet"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2867(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Internet Tab of Edit Person dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2881(term) gramps-manual.xml:3378(term)
|
|
msgid "LDS"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2884(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>LDS</guilabel> (Latter Days Saints) tab lets you view and edit information about LDS ordinances of the person. These are LDS Baptism, Endowment, and Sealed to Parents ordinances, as labeled inside the tab. Each ordinance is described by its date, LDS temple, and Place where it happened. An additional pop-up menu, \"Parents,\" is available for the Sealed to Parents ordinance. Each ordinance can be further described through the selections available in the Status pop-up menu. It can also be include notes and references to sources through the corresponding <guibutton>Sources...</guibutton> and <guibutton>Note</guibutton> buttons."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2899(title)
|
|
msgid "Edit Person dialog - LDS"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2910(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows LDS Tab of Edit Person dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2925(title)
|
|
msgid "Editing Dates"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2927(para)
|
|
msgid "This section describes how to enter and modify dates. Since dates are so important in genealogical research, GRAMPS takes special care to preserve and use any date information available."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2931(para)
|
|
msgid "Information can be entered into a date field by directly typing it or by invoking the Date selection dialog. Both methods will be discussed below, but first, we will cover some important features of dates as they are used in GRAMPS."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2937(title)
|
|
msgid "Date types"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2939(para)
|
|
msgid "Dates in GRAMPS are classified according to the following types:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2944(term)
|
|
msgid "Regular"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2947(para)
|
|
msgid "A \"regular\" date is one which includes a specific day, date, or month. It can be complete (e.g., June 6, 1990) or partial (e.g., July 1977)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2954(term)
|
|
msgid "Before"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2957(para)
|
|
msgid "A \"before\" date is one that can only be identified as occurring before a certain day, month, or year."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2963(term)
|
|
msgid "After"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2966(para)
|
|
msgid "An \"after\" date is one that occurs after a certain day, month, or year."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2972(term)
|
|
msgid "Range"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2975(para)
|
|
msgid "A \"range\" describes a time period during which the event occurred. For example, \"between January 1932 and March 1932.\""
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2982(term)
|
|
msgid "Span"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2985(para)
|
|
msgid "A \"span\" describes a time period during which a condition existed. For example, \"from May 12, 2000 to February 2, 2002.\""
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2994(title)
|
|
msgid "Date formats and parsing rules"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:2996(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS recognizes dates entered in a variety of formats. The default numeric format is that which is conventional for the environment is which GRAMPS is operating; that is, DD.MM.YYYY for most European countries, MM/DD/YYYY for the U.S., and so on."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3001(para)
|
|
msgid "Besides exact dates, GRAMPS recognizes many dates that are not regular: before, after, about, ranges and spans. It also understands the quality: estimated or calculated. Finally, it supports partial dates and many alternative calendars. Below is the list of date entry rules to allow precise date parsing."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3008(title)
|
|
msgid "Date parsing rules"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3010(para)
|
|
msgid "The list only applys to the English version of GRAMPS. If you are using localized version of GRAMPS, your version may or may not provide a localized date parser. At the time of this writing, localized parsers exist for French, German, Russian, Finnish, Dutch and Spanish languages."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3016(para)
|
|
msgid "If the localized parser is available for your version, chances are that other rules are in effect. If there is no manual in your language yet, you may try following your instinct and go with the common ways of denoting dates in your language. If all else fails, use the <guilabel>Date selection</guilabel> dialog described below."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3026(para)
|
|
msgid "Regular single dates can be entered just as you would write them. Examples: May 24, 1961 or January 1, 2004."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3031(para)
|
|
msgid "Dates that are not regular should start with the quality: <guilabel>estimated</guilabel> or <guilabel>calculated</guilabel>, if applicable. Example: est. 1961, or calc 2005. (Note that a quality does not need to be specified for regular dates.)"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3039(para)
|
|
msgid "After the quality should appear the type. If the type is <guilabel>before</guilabel>, <guilabel>after</guilabel>, or <guilabel>about</guilabel>, you scan specify the type by writing \"before\", \"after\" or \"about\". If the type is a range, write \"between DATE and DATE\", and if the type is a span, write \"from DATE to DATE\". patterns, where DATE is a single date."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3046(para)
|
|
msgid "Examples: est from 2001 to 2003, before June 1975, est about 2000, calc between May 1900 and January 1, 1990."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3051(para)
|
|
msgid "Partial dates are entered simply by omitting unknown information. Examples: May 1961 and 2004."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3056(para)
|
|
msgid "Alternate calendars are calendars other than the Gregorian calendar. Currently, GRAMPS supports Hebrew, French Republican, Julian, Islamic, and Persian alternate calendars. To specify the calendar other than the default Gregorian, append the name of the calendar to the date string, e.g. \"January 9, 1905 (julian)\"."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3067(title)
|
|
msgid "Date Validity Indicators"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3069(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS uses color circles to indicate the validity of the entered date."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3073(title)
|
|
msgid "Date LED buttons"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3075(para)
|
|
msgid "The color circles are also referred to as the LED buttons. Clicking on an LED button will invoke the <guilabel>Date selection</guilabel> dialog described in detail below, see <xref linkend=\"adv-dates-gui\"/>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3083(para)
|
|
msgid "A green circle means that the date is valid and complete regular date (e.g. May 24, 1961). In simple terms, green means that the date corresponds to a unique date."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3089(para)
|
|
msgid "Yellow circle means that the date is valid but is not a regular date. This could be the date of a different type: a before date (before May 25, 1962), an after date (after May, 1960), an about date (about May 23, 1961), a range (between May 1, 1961 and May 31, 1961), or a span (from May 1, 1961 to May 31, 1961). It can also be a complete single date, but with quality of Estimated or Calculated. Finally, it could be a partial date, i.e. a regular quality single date missing some portion, e.g. May 1961 or 1961."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3099(para)
|
|
msgid "While partial dates do not uniquely define the day, they allow at least for some type of comparisons between the dates."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3105(para)
|
|
msgid "Red circle means that the date is not recognized as a valid date (e.g. \"Christmas week of 61\", or \"the summer when I had surgery\"). In such a case the date will be stored as a text string and therefore cannot be compared other dates. As you can see, it is best to avoid such date entries. It would be better, for example, to enter a date of \"December 1961\" and then to add the note \"Christmas week of '61.\""
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3117(title)
|
|
msgid "Graphical User Interface for Entering Dates"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3119(para)
|
|
msgid "While the above parsing rules provide a guide for you to type in most common dates, you can also use <guilabel>Date selection</guilabel> dialog. The dialog is particularly useful for building a complex date or for simply insuring that your information is entered in a way GRAMPS will understand. The <guilabel>Date selection</guilabel> dialog can be invoked by clicking the colored circle button next to the date entry field."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3130(title)
|
|
msgid "Date selection dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3140(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Date selection dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3148(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Calendar</guilabel> menu lets you choose a calendar other than the default Gregorian. The <guilabel>Quality</guilabel> menu gives you the choices of Regular, Estimated, or Calculated. The <guilabel>Type</guilabel> menu allows you establish the exact date type: Regular, Before, After, About, Range, Span, and Text only. You can set the <guilabel>Date</guilabel> by setting the day, the month, and the year. In the event that your date type is Range or Span, the <guilabel>Second date</guilabel> will be activated. Finally, the <guilabel>Text comment</guilabel> text entry field allows storing an arbitrary text string along with the date."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3161(para)
|
|
msgid "If you have an important comment to make about a date, you are better off doing so in a Note that corresponds to the event than in the Text comment field of the Date selection dialog. We recommend this for the following reason: If you enter a date by typing it directly into the date field (that is, not via the Date selector dialog), your entry will be copied and stored as the text comment string when GRAMPS parses the entered text. Thus, any comment that may have been there prior to the parsing will be overwritten."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3177(title)
|
|
msgid "Editing Information About Relationships"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3179(para)
|
|
msgid "Information about relationships is entered and edited through the <guilabel>Marriage/Relationship Editor</guilabel> dialog. This dialog is invoked from Family View by double-clicking the Spouse box"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3185(para)
|
|
msgid "You can also invoke this dialog by right-clicking inside the Spouse box and selecting \"Edit relationship\" item from the context menu that pops up."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3193(title)
|
|
msgid "Marriage/Relationship Editor dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3203(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Marriage/Relationship Editor dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3211(para)
|
|
msgid "The top of the window shows the names of the people whose relationship is being edited. The main part of the window displays seven notebook tabs representing different categories of information about the relationship. Click any tab to view or edit the information it contains. The bottom part has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at any time will close the window without applying any changes. If any of the data in any tab is modified, an alert window will appear that will prompt you choose between closing the dialog without saving changes, canceling the initial cancel request, or saving the changes."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3226(para)
|
|
msgid "Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save changes to the database. This version of GRAMPS does not have a separate saving function, all changes are immediate."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3236(para)
|
|
msgid "The tabs provide the following information categories of relationship data:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3244(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab lets you edit the Relationship type. The available types (such as Married, Unmarried, etc.) can be chosen from the drop-down <guilabel>Relationship type</guilabel> menu. The <guilabel>GRAMPS ID</guilabel> field displays the ID number which labels this relationship in the database. The <guilabel>Last changed</guilabel> label shows the last time the relationship was modified. Finally, the Information is complete check button indicates whether the record of this relationship is complete or not."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3263(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Events</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit events relevant to the relationship. The bottom part displays the list of all such events stored in the database. The top part shows the details of the currently selected event in the list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, or remove an event record from the database. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when an event is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3282(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Attributes</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit particular information about the relationship that can be expressed as attributes. The bottom part displays the list of all such attributes stored in the database. The top part shows the details of the currently selected attribute in the list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, or remove an attribute. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when an attribute is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3302(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Notes</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit notes associated with the relationship. These could be any comments which do not naturally fit into the \"Parameter-Value\" pairs available to Attributes. To add a note or modify existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry field."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3308(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option lets you set the way the note will appear in reports and web pages. If you select Flowed, the text generated will have single spaces put in place of all multiple spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters. A blank line inserted between two blocks of text will signal a new paragraph; additional inserted lines will be ignored."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3327(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit the sources which provide evidence for the relationship. These might be documents that refer to the relationship, but which do not necessarily document it officially. For example, if Aunt Martha's memoirs mention that her great-grandson Paul was married, the researcher may take this as evidence of the relationship between Paul and his wife existed and cite the memoirs as the source for this assumption."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3337(para)
|
|
msgid "Sources that document specific events such as marriages or divorces are better filed in relation to those events, under the Events tab."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3342(para)
|
|
msgid "The central part of the Sources window displays the list of all source references associated with the relationship. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow let you add, modify, and remove a source reference to this relationship. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a source reference is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3359(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab lets you store and display photos and other media objects associated with the relationship. The central part of the window lists all such objects and gives you a thumbnail preview of image files. Other objects such as audio files, movie files, etc., are represented by a generic GRAMPS icon. The buttons <guilabel>+</guilabel>, <guilabel>Select</guilabel>, <guilabel>Edit</guilabel>, and <guilabel>-</guilabel> let you add a new image, add a reference to an existing image, modify an existing image, and remove a media object's link to the relationship. Note that the <guilabel>Edit</guilabel> and <guilabel>-</guilabel> buttons become available only when a media object is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3381(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>LDS</guilabel> (Latter Days Saints) tab displays information about the LDS <guilabel>Sealed to Spouse</guilabel> ordinance. The data can include date, LDS temple, and Place. The status of the ordinance can be described through the selections available in the <guilabel>Status</guilabel> pop-up menu and can also be referenced in the corresponding <guibutton>Sources...</guibutton> and <guibutton>Note</guibutton> buttons."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3398(title)
|
|
msgid "Editing Information About Sources"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3400(para)
|
|
msgid "To edit source data, switch to the Sources View and select the desired entry in the list of sources. Double-click that entry or click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> icon on the toolbar to invoke the following <guilabel>Source Editor</guilabel> dialog:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3408(title)
|
|
msgid "Source Editor dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3418(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Source Editor dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3426(para)
|
|
msgid "The main part of the window displays four notebook tabs containing different categories of information. Click a tab to view or edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window without applying any changes."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3436(para) gramps-manual.xml:3769(para)
|
|
msgid "Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save changes to the database (write on disk). All changes are immediate."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3446(para)
|
|
msgid "The tabs provide the following information categories of source data:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3454(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab lets you define basic information about the source: its <guilabel>Title</guilabel>, <guilabel>Author</guilabel>, <guilabel>Abbreviation</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Publication information</guilabel>. You can type this information directly into the adjacent fields."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3465(term) gramps-manual.xml:3637(term) gramps-manual.xml:3952(term) gramps-manual.xml:4135(guilabel) gramps-manual.xml:4246(guilabel) gramps-manual.xml:4356(guilabel)
|
|
msgid "Note"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3468(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab provides a place to record various information about the source that does not fit neatly into other categories. To add a note or modify existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry field."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3478(term)
|
|
msgid "Data"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3481(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Data</guilabel> tab displays \"Key/Value\" pairs that may be associated with the source. These are similar to the \"Attributes\" used for other types of GRAMPS records. The difference between these Key/Value pairs and Attributes is that Attributes may have source references and notes, while Key/Value data may not."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3488(para)
|
|
msgid "The central part of the window lists all existing Key/Value pairs. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add and remove pairs. To modify the text of Key or Value, first select the desired entry. Then click in either the Key or Value cell of that entry and type your text. When you are done, click outside the cell to exit editing mode."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3504(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab lets you store and display photos and other media objects associated with a given source (for example, a photo of a birth certificate). The central part of the window lists all such media objects and gives you a thumbnail preview of image files. Other objects such as audio files, movie files, etc., are represented by a generic GRAMPS icon. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Select</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add a new image, add a reference to an existing image, modify an existing image, and remove a media object's link to the source. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a media object is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3524(term) gramps-manual.xml:3712(term) gramps-manual.xml:3841(term)
|
|
msgid "References"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3527(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab lists all the database records that refer to this source, if any. The list can be ordered by any of its column headings: <guilabel>Type</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, or <guilabel>Name</guilabel>. Double-clicking an entry allows you to view and edit the record."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3535(para)
|
|
msgid "Only primary objects can be shown in the <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab: Person, Family, Event, Place, or Media object. Secondary objects such as Names and Attributes can only be accessed through the primary objects to which they belong."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3549(title)
|
|
msgid "Editing Information About Places"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3551(para)
|
|
msgid "To edit information about places, switch to the Places View and select the desired entry from the list of places. Double-click that entry or click the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> button on the toolbar to bring up the following <guilabel>Place Editor</guilabel> dialog:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3560(title)
|
|
msgid "Place Editor dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3570(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Place Editor dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3578(para)
|
|
msgid "The main part of the window displays seven notebook tabs containing different categories of information. Click a tab to view or edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window without applying any changes."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3588(para)
|
|
msgid "Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will immediately save changes to the database). All changes are immediate."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3597(para)
|
|
msgid "The tabs represent following categories of place data:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3604(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab you view and edit the basic information about the place: the <guilabel>Title</guilabel> which labels it in the database, <guilabel>City</guilabel>, <guilabel>Church parish</guilabel>, <guilabel>County</guilabel>, <guilabel>State</guilabel>, <guilabel>Country</guilabel>, <guilabel>Longitude</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Latitude</guilabel>. You can type this information directly into the adjacent fields."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3618(term)
|
|
msgid "Other names"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3621(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Other names</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit other names by which the place might be known. The bottom part of the window lists all other names of the place stored in the database. The top part of the window shows the details of the currently selected name in the list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, and remove a name record. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a name is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3640(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any comments or notes concerning the place. To add a note or modify existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry field."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3652(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit sources relevant to a place. The central part of the window lists all such source references stored in the database. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, and remove a source reference associated with a place. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a source reference is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3670(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Gallery</guilabel> tab lets you store and display photos and other media objects associated with a given place. The central part of the window lists all such media objects and gives you a thumbnail preview of image files. Other objects such as audio files, movie files, etc., are represented by a generic GRAMPS icon. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Select</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add a new image, add a reference to an existing image, modify an existing image, and remove a media object's link to the place. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a media object is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3692(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Internet</guilabel> tab contains Internet addresses relevant to the place. The bottom part of the window lists all such Internet addresses stored in the database. The top part shows the details of the currently selected address in the list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, and remove an Internet address. The <guibutton>Go</guibutton> button (represented by an icon with a green arrow and yellow circle) opens your browser and takes you to the web page corresponding to the highlighted Internet address. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, <guibutton>-</guibutton>, and <guibutton>Go</guibutton> buttons become available only when an address is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3715(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab indicates any database records (events or LDS ordinances) that refer to a place. This information cannot be modified from the Place Editor dialog. Instead, the corresponding database record (e.g., a birth event) has to be brought up and its place reference edited."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3729(title)
|
|
msgid "Editing Information About Media Objects"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3731(para)
|
|
msgid "To edit media data, switch to the Media View and select the desired entry in the list of sources. Double-click on that entry or click <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> on the toolbar to invoke the following <guilabel>Media Properties Editor</guilabel> dialog:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3739(title)
|
|
msgid "Media Properties Editor dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3749(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Media Properties Editor dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3757(para)
|
|
msgid "A thumbnail preview of the object is presented, along with a summary of its properties (ID, path, and object type). The central part of the window displays five notebook tabs containing different categories of information. Click a tab to view or edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window without applying any changes."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3779(para)
|
|
msgid "The tabs represent the following categories of media data:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3787(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit the object's Title and Date. You can type this information directly into the corresponding fields. For the Date, you can also enter information by clicking the LED button and invoking the <guilabel>Date selection</guilabel> dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3794(para)
|
|
msgid "Every media object is referred to by its Path. The user is responsible for keeping track of the object files. GRAMPS will only reference and display the contents, not manage the files themselves."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3808(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Attributes</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit particular information about the media object that can be expressed as Attributes. The bottom part displays the list of all such attributes stored in the database. The top part shows the details of the currently selected attribute in the list (if any). The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, or remove an attribute. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when an attribute is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3828(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab provides a place to record various information about the source that does not fit neatly into other categories. This area is particularly useful for recording information that does not naturally fit into the \"Parameter/Value\" pairs available to Attributes. To add a note or modify existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry field."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3844(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab indicates any database records that refer to a given media object. The list can be ordered according to any of its column headings: <guilabel>Type</guilabel>, <guilabel>ID</guilabel>, or <guilabel>Name</guilabel>. Double-clicking an entry allows you to view and edit the corresponding record."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3852(para)
|
|
msgid "Only primary objects can be shown in the <guilabel>References</guilabel> tab: Person, Family, Event, Source, or Place. The secondary objects such as Names and Attributes, although able to refer the media object, will only show up through their primary objects to which they belong."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3867(title)
|
|
msgid "Editing Information About Events"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3869(para)
|
|
msgid "Events are edited through the <guilabel>Event Editor</guilabel> dialog. This dialog can be accessed from either the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog or the <guilabel>Marriage/Relationship</guilabel> dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3877(title)
|
|
msgid "Event Editor dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3887(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Event Editor dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3895(para)
|
|
msgid "The central part of the window displays five notebook tabs containing different categories of information. Click a tab to view or edit its contents. The bottom part of the window has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button will close the window without applying any changes."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3909(para)
|
|
msgid "The tabs provide the following information categories of the event data:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3917(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit basic information about the event: its <guilabel>Type</guilabel>, <guilabel>Date</guilabel>, <guilabel>Place</guilabel>, <guilabel>Cause</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Description</guilabel>. You can type this information directly into the adjacent fields. The type can be selected from available types listed in the Event type drop-down menu. The rest of the information can be typed in the appropriate text entry fields. Checking the Private record box marks the event record as private and allows it to be omitted from reports."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3937(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab lets you view and edit sources relevant to an event. The central part of the window lists all such source references stored in the database. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> let you add, modify, and remove a source reference associated with a place. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a source reference is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3955(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab provides a place to record notes or comments about the event. To add a note or modify existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry field."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3969(title)
|
|
msgid "Editing Source References"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3971(para)
|
|
msgid "Source references connect a Source to another object and allow you to provide additional information about the source. When adding source references to events, places, etc., the following dialog appears:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3979(title)
|
|
msgid "Source Information dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3989(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Source Information dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:3997(para)
|
|
msgid "The dialog includes two main headings, <guilabel>Source selection</guilabel> and <guilabel>Source details</guilabel>. <guilabel>Source selection</guilabel> displays the <guilabel>Title</guilabel> of the Source, its <guilabel>Author</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Publication information</guilabel>. The <guilabel>Title</guilabel> can be selected from the available sources listed in the drop-down menu. If the source you are referencing is not already in the database, you can enter it by clicking <guibutton>New...</guibutton> and filling out the invoked <guilabel>Source Editor</guilabel> dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4008(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Source details</guilabel> section indicates the details associated with the particular reference to this Source: <guilabel>Confidence</guilabel>, <guilabel>Volume/Film/Page</guilabel>, <guilabel>Date</guilabel>, <guilabel>Text</guilabel>, and <guilabel>Comments</guilabel>. You can choose the Confidence level from the <guilabel>Confidence</guilabel> drop-down menu. The remaining details can be typed in the corresponding text entry fields."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4018(para)
|
|
msgid "Information in this dialog is specific to the particular reference. A single source can be referenced many times, and all such references will have in common the overall source information. This dialog lets you provide reference-specific data, such as relevant quotes, comments, confidence, page numbers, etc., to further specify and document the reference."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4032(para)
|
|
msgid "Names are edited through the following <guilabel>Name Editor</guilabel> dialog:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4038(title)
|
|
msgid "Name Editor dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4048(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Name Editor dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4056(para)
|
|
msgid "The top of the window shows the dialog title including the name of the person whose name is being edited. The central part of the window displays three notebook tabs containing different categories of available information. You can bring any tab to the top for viewing or editing by clicking on the appropriate tab heading. The bottom part has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at any time will close the window without applying any changes."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4068(para) gramps-manual.xml:4197(para) gramps-manual.xml:4308(para)
|
|
msgid "The tab labels reflect the presence of corresponding information: if the tab contains any data, its label appears boldface; if the tab has no data then its label appears regular (not bold)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4074(para)
|
|
msgid "The tabs provide the following information categories of the name data:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4082(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of general information about the name: given name, family name, patronymic (a form of father's name used in some languages, e.g. Russian), family prefix, suffix, title, and type of the name. The information can be typed in the appropriate text entry fields. The family name and the type can be also selected from available choices listed in the appropriate drop-down menus."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4091(para)
|
|
msgid "<guilabel>Options</guilabel> allow you to adjust specific grouping, sorting, and displaying properties of this name, as well as to provide the date corresponding to the name. The <guilabel>Grouping</guilabel> field provides an alternative grouping node for a given name, overriding the default grouping based on the family name. This may be necessary with similar family names that need to be grouped together -- for example Russian names Ivanov and Ivanova are considered the same, but difference in gender is reflected in different spelling. To enable typing into this field, check the <guilabel>Override</guilabel> check button. The <guilabel>Sort as</guilabel> and <guilabel>Display as</guilabel> determine the manner in which the name appears in the People View and in the reports. The <guilabel>Date</guilabel> can provide information on the validity of this name -- use spans as necessary. Check the <guilabel>Private record</guilabel> box to mark this name record as private. This will give you a chance to omit this name from being included in reports, if you choose so among the report generation options."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4119(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays information about sources relevant to this name and controls allowing its modification. The central part displays the list of all such sources' references stored in the database. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly add, modify, and remove a source reference to this name. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a source reference is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4138(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes concerning the name. To add a note or modify existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry field."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4142(para) gramps-manual.xml:4253(para) gramps-manual.xml:4363(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Format</guilabel> option allows you to set the appearance of the note in the output (i.e. in reports and web pages). Selecting <guilabel>Flowed</guilabel> will replace all multiple spaces, tabs, and single end-of-line characters with single space in the output. The two consecutive new lines (i.e. an empty line) denote a new paragraph. Selecting <guilabel>Preformatted</guilabel> will honor all multiple spaces tabs, and new lines, so that the output will appear as it is entered into the text entry field."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4161(para)
|
|
msgid "Attributes are edited through the following <guilabel>Attribute Editor</guilabel> dialog:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4167(title)
|
|
msgid "Attribute Editor dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4177(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Attribute Editor dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4185(para)
|
|
msgid "The top of the window shows the dialog title including the name of the person whose attribute is being edited. The central part of the window displays three notebook tabs containing different categories of available information. You can bring any tab to the top for viewing or editing by clicking on the appropriate tab heading. The bottom part has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at any time will close the window without applying any changes."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4203(para)
|
|
msgid "The tabs provide the following information categories of the attribute data:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4211(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of the most general information about the attribute: name of the attribute and its value. The information can be typed in the appropriate text entry fields. The attribute name can also be selected from available choices (if any) listed in the <guilabel>Attribute </guilabel> drop-down menu. Check the <guilabel>Private record</guilabel> box to mark this attribute record as private. This will give you a chance to omit this attribute from being included in the reports, if you choose so among the report generation options."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4230(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays information about sources relevant to this attribute and controls allowing its modification. The central part displays the list of all such sources references stored in the database. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly add, modify, and remove a source reference to this attribute. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a source reference is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4249(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes concerning the attribute. To add a note or modify existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry field."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4272(para)
|
|
msgid "Addresses are edited through the following <guilabel>Address Editor</guilabel> dialog:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4278(title)
|
|
msgid "Address Editor dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4288(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Address Editor dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4296(para)
|
|
msgid "The top of the window shows the dialog title including the name of the person whose address is being edited. The central part of the window displays three notebook tabs containing different categories of available information. You can bring any tab to the top for viewing or editing by clicking on the appropriate tab heading. The bottom part has <guibutton>OK</guibutton> and <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> buttons. Clicking the <guibutton>OK</guibutton> button at any time will apply all the changes made in all tabs and close the dialog window. Clicking the <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> button at any time will close the window without applying any changes."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4314(para)
|
|
msgid "The tabs provide the following information categories of the address data:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4322(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>General</guilabel> tab allows editing of the most general information about the address: date, street address, city or county, state or province, country, the postal code, and the phone number. The information can be typed in the appropriate text entry fields. Check the <guilabel>Private record</guilabel> box to mark this address record as private. This will give you a chance to omit this address from being included in reports, if you choose so among the report generation options."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4340(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Sources</guilabel> tab displays information about sources relevant to this address and controls allowing its modification. The central part displays the list of all such sources references stored in the database. The buttons <guibutton>+</guibutton>, <guibutton>Edit</guibutton>, and <guibutton>-</guibutton> allow you to correspondingly add, modify, and remove a source reference to this address. Note that the <guibutton>Edit</guibutton> and <guibutton>-</guibutton> buttons become available only when a source reference is selected from the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4359(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Note</guilabel> tab displays any notes concerning the address. To add a note or modify existing notes simply edit the text in the text entry field."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4380(title)
|
|
msgid "Merging records"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4382(para)
|
|
msgid "Sometime several records in the database turn out to be describing the same object: same person, same place, or same source. It could happen either when the data is entered twice by mistake, or when new information reveals that the two entries refer to the same person. It can also happen after importing GEDCOM obtained from a relative, whose database overlaps with your existing data."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4389(para)
|
|
msgid "Whenever you detect duplicate records, merging them a useful way of correcting the situation."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4393(para)
|
|
msgid "To make a merge, exactly two records have to be selected in the appropriate view (People View, Sources View, or Places View). This is accomplished by selecting one entry and then selecting another person while holding down <keycap>Ctrl</keycap> key."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4400(title)
|
|
msgid "Merge People"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4402(para)
|
|
msgid "There are two ways of merging personal records: <guilabel>Compare and Merge</guilabel> and <guilabel>Fast Merge</guilabel>, both available from the <guimenu>Edit</guimenu> menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4408(para)
|
|
msgid "Merging people does not discard any information with either method. The decisions you make during the merge only affect which data will become primary and which will become secondary for the resulting merged record."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4416(guilabel)
|
|
msgid "Compare and Merge"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4419(para)
|
|
msgid "When exactly two people are selected, choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Compare and Merge...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to invoke <guilabel>Compare People</guilabel> dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4429(title)
|
|
msgid "Compare People dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4440(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Compare People dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4448(para)
|
|
msgid "The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or not the selected records should be merged. If you decide that the records should not be merged, despite similar names, you may click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close the dialog without making any changes. If you decide to proceed with merging, select the appropriate <guilabel>Select</guilabel> radio button to specify the record to be used as the source of primary data, then click <guibutton>Merge and close</guibutton>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4458(para)
|
|
msgid "The data from the other record will be kept as alternate data. Specifically, all names from the other record will become alternate names of the merged record. Similarly, parents, spouses, and children of the other record will become alternate parents, spouses, and children of the merged record, and so on."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4470(guilabel)
|
|
msgid "Fast Merge"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4473(para)
|
|
msgid "When exactly two people are selected, choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Fast Merge</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to invoke <guilabel>Merge People</guilabel> dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4483(title)
|
|
msgid "Merge People dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4494(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Merge People dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4502(para)
|
|
msgid "The dialog allows you to quickly merge two records, specifying the record to be used as the source of primary data. The data from the other record will be kept as alternate data. Specifically, all names from the other record will become alternate names of the merged record. Similarly, parents, spouses, and children of the other record will become alternate parents, spouses, and children of the merged record, and so on."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4512(para)
|
|
msgid "If you are not certain whether or not you need to merge the records, or which record to specify as the source of primary data, use <guilabel>Compare and Merge</guilabel> method described above.."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4525(title)
|
|
msgid "Merge Sources"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4527(para)
|
|
msgid "When exactly two sources are selected, choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Compare and Merge...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to invoke <guilabel>Merge Sources</guilabel> dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4537(title)
|
|
msgid "Merge Sources dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4547(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Merge Sources dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4555(para)
|
|
msgid "The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or not the selected records should be merged. If you decide that the records should not be merged, despite similar titles, you may click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close the dialog without making any changes. If you decide to proceed with merging, choose the appropriate radio button to specify the title, author, abbreviated title, publication information, and the ID to be used for the merged record, then click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4566(title)
|
|
msgid "Merge Places"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4568(para)
|
|
msgid "When exactly two places are selected, choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Compare and Merge...</guimenuitem></menuchoice> to invoke <guilabel>Select title</guilabel> dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4578(title)
|
|
msgid "Merge Places dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4588(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Select title dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4596(para)
|
|
msgid "The dialog allows you to make a decision on whether or not the selected records should be merged. If you decide that the records should not be merged, despite similar titles, you may click <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> to close the dialog without making any changes. If you decide to proceed with merging, choose the appropriate radio button to specify the title of the merged record, or specify <guilabel>Other</guilabel> and enter new text, then click <guibutton>OK</guibutton>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4611(title)
|
|
msgid "Navigation"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4613(para)
|
|
msgid "As long as any database is open, GRAMPS is focused on a single person usually referred to as an Active person. This allows you to view or modify the data concerning this person, his or her immediate family, etc. Navigating in the database (i.e. moving from person to person) is in fact nothing else but changing the Active person. This section describes many alternative ways to navigate through the database using both the complex and the convenient interfaces GRAMPS provides. All these ways eventually accomplish the same thing, but some are more convenient than others, depending what you are doing in GRAMPS at the moment."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4627(title)
|
|
msgid "Using the People View"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4629(para)
|
|
msgid "The most intuitive way to select an active person is to use the People View (see <xref linkend=\"people-view\"/>). When in the People View, just select the name of the desired person from the list by clicking that list entry. The person you have selected becomes active. The statusbar updates to reflect the change of the active person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4640(title)
|
|
msgid "Using the Family View"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4642(para)
|
|
msgid "When in the Family View (see <xref linkend=\"relationships-view\"/>), you can easily navigate between the members of the displayed family as follows:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4648(para)
|
|
msgid "To make the currently selected spouse the active person, click the double-arrow button to the right of the active person box. Alternatively, right-click into the spouse box and select <guilabel>Make the selected spouse an active person</guilabel> item from the context menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4656(para)
|
|
msgid "To make the currently selected parents the active family (thereby making father the active person and mother the selected spouse), click the right-arrow button to the right of the active person's parents box. Alternatively, right-click into the active person's parents box and select <guilabel>Make the selected parents the active family</guilabel> item from the context menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4666(para)
|
|
msgid "To make the currently selected spouse's parents the active family (thereby making father the active person and mother the selected spouse), click the right-arrow button to the right of the spouse's parents box. Alternatively, right-click into the spouse's parents box and select <guilabel>Make the selected parents the active family</guilabel> item from the context menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4675(para)
|
|
msgid "To make the currently selected child the active person, click the left-arrow button to the right of the children box. Alternatively, right-click into the children box and select <guilabel>Make the selected child an active person</guilabel> item from the context menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4683(para)
|
|
msgid "In addition to this, GRAMPS provides an extensive set of keyboard navigation options. The detailed reference to the key bindings is found in the <xref linkend=\"append-keybind\"/>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4691(title)
|
|
msgid "Using the Pedigree View"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4693(para)
|
|
msgid "The Pedigree View (see <xref linkend=\"pedigree-view\"/>) also allows you to move along the family tree. The benefit of this method is that you can see more than one generation of the family tree. Also, you can jump directly from a great-grandson to a great-grandfather without going through the intermediate generations."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4699(para)
|
|
msgid "Note that after changing the active person in the Pedigree View, the display is re-adjusted to show four generations, starting from the newly selected Active person. When in the Pedigree View, you can easily navigate between the members of the displayed family tree as follows:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4707(para)
|
|
msgid "To make any displayed person the active person, double-click the line that connects to the left side of the corresponding box."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4713(para)
|
|
msgid "To make a child of the currently active person (if any) the active person, click the left arrow button to the left of the corresponding box. If there is more than one child, the button expands to the menu listing the children to choose from."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4720(para)
|
|
msgid "To move the whole family tree one generation back, click on the corresponding right arrow button on the right-hand side of the display area. Clicking the upper button will move the tree along the paternal line. Clicking the lower button will move the tree along the maternal line."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4726(para)
|
|
msgid "Clicking either of these buttons is completely equivalent to double-clicking the lines connecting to the left of the corresponding boxes for father and mother."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4732(para)
|
|
msgid "You can also quickly access any of the spouses, siblings, children, or parents of any displayed person. To do this, move the mouse over the desired person's box and right-click to invoke a context menu. The appropriate menu items will contain submenus listing all spouses, siblings, children, and parents of the corresponding person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4740(title)
|
|
msgid "Advantages of using right-click menus"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4744(para)
|
|
msgid "Direct access to spouse and siblings"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4748(para)
|
|
msgid "Complete lists of all member of all categories, not only the preferred members."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4758(title)
|
|
msgid "Setting the Home Person"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4760(para)
|
|
msgid "One and only one person in the database can be selected as the Home person. Once the Home person is selected, moving to that person becomes a matter of a single click, regardless of which view you are using at the moment."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4765(para)
|
|
msgid "To set the Home person, first navigate to that person using any method you like. Then choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Set Home person</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Once this is done, you can move to the Home person from anywhere in the database by simply clicking the <guibutton>Home</guibutton> icon on the toolbar. You can also choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Go</guimenu><guimenuitem>Home</guimenuitem></menuchoice> from the menu or select <guilabel>Home</guilabel> item from any context menu available on the right click."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4784(title)
|
|
msgid "Using history-based tools"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4786(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS also features a powerful set of history-based navigation tools. These tools are similar to those commonly used in web browsers. They include <guilabel>Back</guilabel> and <guilabel>Forward</guilabel> items available from the <menuchoice><guimenu>Go</guimenu></menuchoice> menu, context menus (available in People, Family, and Pedigree views), and the toolbar buttons. They also include the list of the recent selections available under the <menuchoice><guimenu>Go</guimenu></menuchoice> menu that allows you to jump directly to any of the recent selections. Finally, right-clicking on the <guibutton>Back</guibutton> and <guibutton>Forward</guibutton> toolbar buttons invokes the popup menu with corresponding portion of the history. Select any item from the menu to jump directly to it."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4805(title)
|
|
msgid "Bookmarking People"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4807(para)
|
|
msgid "Similar to setting the Home person, you can bookmark other people from the database to simplify further navigation. To bookmark a person, first navigate to that person, then choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu><guimenuitem>Add bookmark</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. To move to that person from anywhere in the database, choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu><guisubmenu>Go to bookmark</guisubmenu><guimenuitem><replaceable>Person's name</replaceable></guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4823(para)
|
|
msgid "You can manage your bookmarks by choosing <menuchoice><guimenu>Bookmarks</guimenu><guimenuitem>Edit bookmarks...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>. This opens the following <guilabel>Edit Bookmarks</guilabel> dialog with the list of bookmarks and the controls to modify this list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4834(title)
|
|
msgid "Edit Bookmarks dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4844(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Edit Bookmarks dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4856(title)
|
|
msgid "Finding records"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4858(para)
|
|
msgid "To find a record in a database, first switch to the appropriate View that provides the list of the desired records: People, Sources, Places, or Media. Then start typing the name of a person or the title of a Source, Place, or Media object that you are looking for, respectively. You may also press <keycap>Ctrl+F</keycap> to turn on the search mode, but simply staring to type is also enough."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4868(title)
|
|
msgid "Type-ahead find"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4878(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows type-ahead find."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4886(para)
|
|
msgid "As you type, the first record in the list that is compatible with your input will be selected."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4890(title)
|
|
msgid "Finding People"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4892(para)
|
|
msgid "For more complex people searches you may want to use filters. Enable filter controls by choosing <menuchoice><guimenu>View</guimenu><guimenuitem>Filter</guimenuitem></menuchoice>, select the desired filter, and click <guibutton>Apply</guibutton>. For details, see <xref linkend=\"filters\"/>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4907(title)
|
|
msgid "Generating Reports"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4909(para)
|
|
msgid "Reports are the most common form of the output produced by genealogical research. The majority of genealogical software puts a lot of emphasis on developing nice looking reports. GRAMPS is no exception in this regard, offering a choice of a variety of reports. GRAMPS can generate reports in a multitude of open formats, both text based and graphical. GRAMPS can also produce screen based reports that are convenient for viewing a summary of your database. Finally, GRAMPS can generate a web site suitable for immediate posting on the Internet. All of these are almost infinitely flexible. If you wish to modify or extend the default format of GRAMPS report, you can design and choose the style for each of your reports."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4921(para)
|
|
msgid "All reports can be accessed through the menu by choosing <menuchoice><guimenu>Reports</guimenu><guisubmenu><replaceable>Report Type</replaceable></guisubmenu><guimenuitem><replaceable>Particular Report</replaceable></guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Alternatively, you can browse the complete selection of available reports along with their brief descriptions in a <guilabel>Report Selection</guilabel> dialog invoked by clicking the <guibutton>Reports</guibutton> icon on the toolbar."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4937(title)
|
|
msgid "Substitution Values"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4939(para)
|
|
msgid "Many of the graphical reports allow you to customize the information on the display. Variable substituions are used to substitute date for a particular symbol. There are two styles of variables. The difference between the two styles is how empty data is handled."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4945(para)
|
|
msgid "The first style of variables are preceeded by a '$'. If the variable evaluates to an empty string, the variable is replaced with the empty string. The second style of variables are preceeded by a '%'. If the variable evaluates to an empty string, the line that contains the variable is removed from the output."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4953(term)
|
|
msgid "$n/%n"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4956(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays the person's name in the form of FirstName LastName"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4962(term)
|
|
msgid "$N/%N"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4965(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays the person's name in the form of LastName, FirstName"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4971(term)
|
|
msgid "$i/%i"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4974(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays the GRAMPS ID associated with the person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4979(term)
|
|
msgid "$b/%b"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4982(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays the person's date of birth"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4987(term)
|
|
msgid "$B/%B"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4990(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays the person's place of birth"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4995(term)
|
|
msgid "$d/%d"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:4998(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays the person's date of death"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5003(term)
|
|
msgid "$D/%D"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5006(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays the person's place of death"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5011(term)
|
|
msgid "$s/%s"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5014(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays the name of the person's preferred spouse in the form of FirstName LastName"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5020(term)
|
|
msgid "$S/%S"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5023(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays the name of the person's preferred spouse in the form of LastName, FirstName."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5029(term)
|
|
msgid "$m/%m"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5032(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays the marriage date of the person and the preferred spouse."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5038(term)
|
|
msgid "$M/%M"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5041(para)
|
|
msgid "Displays the place assocated with the marriage of the person and the preferred spouse."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5049(title)
|
|
msgid "Books"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5051(para)
|
|
msgid "Currently, the only available report under this category is the Book Report."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5054(para)
|
|
msgid "The Book Report creates a single document (i.e. a Book) containing a collection of graphical and textual reports. Consequently, this allows for a very rich set of documents that GRAMPS can produce."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5059(para)
|
|
msgid "When Book Report is selected, the following book configuration dialog appears:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5065(title)
|
|
msgid "Book Report dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5075(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Book Report dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5083(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Book name</guilabel> text entry field is used to save the book (a set of configured selections) for future use. The top pane lists the items available for inclusion in the book. The bottom pane lists the currently selected items in the order they will appear in the book."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5089(para)
|
|
msgid "The horizontal set of buttons by the <guilabel>Book name</guilabel> field operates on the whole book. Click the <guibutton>Clear</guibutton> button to clear all items from the current book. Click the <guibutton>Save</guibutton> button to save the current book (under the name typed in the <guilabel>Book name</guilabel> text entry field) for future use."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5097(para)
|
|
msgid "Saving the book also saves the configuration for each item."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5101(para)
|
|
msgid "Click the <guibutton>Open</guibutton> button to load the book from the list of previously saved books. Finally, click the <guibutton>Edit books</guibutton> button to invoke the editable list of available books."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5106(para)
|
|
msgid "The vertical set of buttons to the right of the bottom pane operates on the selected book item. Click the <guibutton>Add</guibutton> button to add selected item from the available list to the current book. Click the <guibutton>Remove</guibutton> button to remove an item from the current book. Use <guibutton>Up</guibutton> and <guibutton>Down</guibutton> to change the items order in the current book. Click the <guibutton>Setup</guibutton> button to configure the options of the selected item of the current book."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5116(para)
|
|
msgid "The configuration dialogs invoked by <guibutton>Setup</guibutton> are item-specific. If you choose not to configure the item, same defaults will be used for all needed options. The common option for almost all book items is the center person: the person on whom the item is centered. Thanks to this option, you can create a book with items centered on different people (e.g. your mom's and dad's ancestors as separate chapters). By default, the center person is set to the active person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5125(para)
|
|
msgid "Almost all items available for inclusion in the book are textual or graphical reports, and are therefore available in the form of standalone reports. The exception is the following items which are only available as book items:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5132(term)
|
|
msgid "Title Page"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5135(para)
|
|
msgid "This item produces a customized Title page. You can configure the text of title, subtitle, and the footer of the page. An image can be optionally placed between the subtitle and the footer. Because of its configurability, this item can be used to create title pages for the whole book, its chapter, or even a single item."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5145(term)
|
|
msgid "Custom Text"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5148(para)
|
|
msgid "This item produces a page with three paragraphs, each containing custom text. The appearance of the text can be adjusted by using custom styles. This item was meant to be used for epigraphs, dedications, explanations, notes, and so forth."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5161(title)
|
|
msgid "Code Generators"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5163(para)
|
|
msgid "This category contains reports that produce code intended to be run through the computer, rather than the usual formatted output for human reading. The only code generator currently available in GRAMPS is the Relationship Graph producing the GraphViz description of the graph."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5169(para)
|
|
msgid "The Relationship Graph creates a complex relationship graph in GraphViz format. The GraphViz <command>dot</command> tool can transform the graph into postscript, jpeg, png, vrml, svg, and other formats. GraphViz tools are freely available from the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.graphviz.org\">GraphViz site</ulink>. Specific options for this report include filter and number of generations considered, as well as several GraphViz-specific options related to pagination, color, and details of the graph."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5179(para)
|
|
msgid "If you are not interested in GraphViz code itself and just want to generate graphical output, GRAMPS can do it for you under the hood. Look for <guilabel>Relationship Graph</guilabel> in the Graphical Reports category, <xref linkend=\"rep-graph\"/>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5189(title)
|
|
msgid "Graphical Reports"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5191(para)
|
|
msgid "Graphical reports represent information in forms of charts and graphs. Most of the options are common among graphical reports, therefore they will be described only once, at the end of this section. The few options which are specific to a given report will be described directly in that report's entry."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5197(para)
|
|
msgid "The following graphical reports are currently available in GRAMPS:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5202(term)
|
|
msgid "Ancestor Chart"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5205(para)
|
|
msgid "This report generates the chart of people who are ancestors of the Active person. Specific options include the number of generations considered and the format of the displayed entries."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5213(term)
|
|
msgid "Ancestor Chart (Wall Chart)"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5216(para)
|
|
msgid "This report is similar to the Ancestor Chart report. It provides more options which make it useful for generating huge charts suitable for a poster or a wall chart. These options include the ability to compress the report (getting rid of an empty space) and the option to fit the whole chart on to a single page. In the latter case, the contents of the chart is scaled down appropriately."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5227(term)
|
|
msgid "Descendant Graph"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5230(para)
|
|
msgid "This report generates a graph of people who are descendants of the Active person. Specific options include the format of the displayed entries."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5237(term)
|
|
msgid "Fan Chart"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5240(para)
|
|
msgid "This report produces a chart resembling a fan, with Active person in the center, parents the the semicircle next to it, grandparents in the next semicircle, and so on, for a total of five generations."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5248(term)
|
|
msgid "Relationship Graph"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5251(para)
|
|
msgid "This report creates a complex relationship graph in GraphViz format and then converts into graphical output running it through the the GraphViz <command>dot</command> tool behind the scene. Specific options for this report include filter, options for dates and places for the events, and whether to include URLs and IDs for individuals and families. There are also several GraphViz-specific options related to pagination, color, and details of the graph."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5263(term)
|
|
msgid "Statistics Chart"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5266(para)
|
|
msgid "This report can collect and display a wealth of statistical data about your database. Specific options include filter, sorting methods, and additional birth- and gender-based limit for inclusion into statistics. You can also set the minimum number of items to qualify for the bar chart, so that the charts with fewer items will generate a pie chart instead. The <guilabel>Chart Selection</guilabel> tab allows you to check which charts you want to include in your report."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5278(term)
|
|
msgid "Timeline Graph"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5281(para)
|
|
msgid "This report outputs the list of people with their lifetimes represented by intervals on a common chronological scale. Specific options include filter, sorting method, and the title of the report."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5289(para)
|
|
msgid "Common options for graphical reports are the filename of the output, the format of the output, selected style, page size and orientation. Optionally, the reports can be immediately opened with the default application."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5295(para) gramps-manual.xml:5448(para)
|
|
msgid "The options used in reports are persistent: each report remembers its options used last time."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5303(title)
|
|
msgid "Text Reports"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5305(para)
|
|
msgid "Text reports represent the desired information as formatted text. Most of the options are common among text reports, therefore they will be described only once, at the end of this section. The options which are specific to a given report will be described directly in that report's entry."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5311(para)
|
|
msgid "The following text reports are currently available in GRAMPS:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5316(term)
|
|
msgid "Ahnentafel Report"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5319(para)
|
|
msgid "This report lists the active person and his or her ancestors along with their vital data. The people are numbered in a special way which is an established standard called Ahnentafel. The active person is given number 1. His or her father and mother have numbers 2 and 3, respectively. This rule holds for every person while going back in generations: father's parents are numbered 4 and 5, and mother's parents are numbered 6 and 7, fathers always numbered with even and mothers with odd numbers. Therefore, for any person having number N in this tree, the numbers of father and mother are 2N and 2N+1, respectively."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5334(term)
|
|
msgid "Complete Individual Report"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5337(para)
|
|
msgid "This report provides individual summaries similar to that of the Individual Summary report. The advantage of this report is the specific filter option. Depending on the filter choice (active person only, his or her descendants, his or her ancestors, or entire database), the report may contain from one to many individual summaries. Another option for this report is the inclusion of source information when listing events."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5348(term)
|
|
msgid "Comprehensive Ancestors Report"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5351(para)
|
|
msgid "This report produces a comprehensive description of ancestors of the active person. The highlights of this report include elaborate layout, images of children, present and former spouses, and source citations. Specific options: number of backward generations to consider, whether to cite sources, and whether to break pages between generations."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5361(term)
|
|
msgid "Descendant Report"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5364(para)
|
|
msgid "This report produces a brief description of descendants of the active person. Specific options: number of forward generations to consider."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5371(term)
|
|
msgid "Detailed Ancestral Report"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5374(para)
|
|
msgid "This report covers in detail the ancestors of the active person. It includes vital data (birth and death) as well as marriages. Specific options: number of backward generations to consider, as well as a variety of options regarding the exact contents to include."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5383(term)
|
|
msgid "Detailed Descendant Report"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5386(para)
|
|
msgid "This report covers in detail the descendants of the active person. It includes vital (birth and death) information as well as marriages. Specific options: number of forward generations to consider."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5394(term)
|
|
msgid "FTM Style Ancestral Report"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5397(para)
|
|
msgid "This report creates an ancestral report similar to that produced by the Family Tree Maker (tm) program. It covers in detail the active person and his/her ancestors It includes vital information as well as marriages, children, and notes. Specific options: number of backward generations to consider."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5406(term)
|
|
msgid "FTM Style Descendant Report"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5409(para)
|
|
msgid "This report creates a descendant report similar to that produced by the Family Tree Maker (tm) program. It covers in detail the active person and his/her descendants. It includes vital information as well as marriages, children, and notes. Specific options: number of forward generations to consider."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5419(term)
|
|
msgid "Family Group Report"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5422(para)
|
|
msgid "This creates a family group report, showing information on a set of parents and their children. Specific options: the spouse (available only if the active person has more than one spouse)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5430(term)
|
|
msgid "Individual Summary"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5433(para)
|
|
msgid "This report produces a detailed summary on the active person. The report includes all the facts known to the database about that person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5440(para)
|
|
msgid "Common options for text reports are the filename of the output, the format of the output, selected style, page size and orientation. For HTML reports, there is no page information. Instead, HTML options include the choice of the HTML template, either available in GRAMPS or a custom template defined by you. Optionally, the reports can be immediately opened with the default application."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5456(title)
|
|
msgid "View Reports"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5458(para)
|
|
msgid "View reports are representing overall summaries of the database information available immediately for on-screen viewing. The following view reports are currently available in GRAMPS:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5464(term)
|
|
msgid "Number of ancestors"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5467(para)
|
|
msgid "This report displays the number of ancestors of the active person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5473(term)
|
|
msgid "Summary of the database"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5476(para)
|
|
msgid "This report displays the overall statistics concerning number of individuals of each gender, various incomplete entries statistics, as well as family and media statistics."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5487(title)
|
|
msgid "Web Page"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5489(para)
|
|
msgid "The only available report in this category is the Narrative Web Site report. It generates a web site (that is, a set of linked web pages), for a set of selected individuals."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5494(title)
|
|
msgid "Narrative Web Site"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5498(term)
|
|
msgid "Introduction"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5501(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS 2.0.6 introduced the Narrative Web generator. The new tool provides considerably more functionality than the older web generator. Instead of using HTML templates to customize the pages, CSS style sheets are used."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5506(para)
|
|
msgid "More information is now displayed about each person, along with information about sources, places, and media objects. Introduction pages can be added to provide additional information, such as family history."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5514(term)
|
|
msgid "Selecting the output"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5517(para)
|
|
msgid "Genealogy records can generate a lot of files. Many web servers have a difficult time with many files in a single directory. The Narrative Web Generator strives to keep the number of files per directory to a managable level. To do this, a hierarchy of directores is created. The generated files names are not intuitive, but are unique per person. Subsequent runs will geneate identical file names, making it easy to replace files."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5526(para)
|
|
msgid "By default, the output files are written to the specified directory. Because of the number of files and directories that are created, it may be difficult to transfer the files to an external web host. To aid in this, you may directly create a gzip'd tar file to more easily upload the data. This is the format that should be used if you would like to take advantage of the free genealogy page hosting at the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://family.gramps-project.org\">GRAMPS web hosting site</ulink>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5537(para)
|
|
msgid "To select the gzip'd tar file, select the <guilabel>Store web pages in .tar.gz archive</guilabel> option."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5544(term)
|
|
msgid "Applying a filter"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5547(para)
|
|
msgid "Like the previous web page generator, and most of the other GRAMPS reports, you can control what is included in the output by choosing a filter. Several default filters are provided for you, but you are free to use the Custom Filter Editor tool to create your own."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5553(para)
|
|
msgid "Any person matching this filter who is not excluded due to the privacy rules, will be included in the output. The default filter includes all people in the database."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5560(term)
|
|
msgid "Applying a style sheet"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5563(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS provides six built in style sheets for your web page. Each of these style sheets produces a unique look for your pages. The generated style sheet is named <filename>narrative.css</filename>. You may edit this file if you wish to further customize your site."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5569(para)
|
|
msgid "If you make modifications to your style sheet, you need to be aware the regenerating the pages with the same output directory will overwrite your changes to this file. To prevent this from happening, make sure you choose <guilabel>No style sheet</guilabel> for subsequent runs."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5578(term)
|
|
msgid "Character set encoding"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5581(para)
|
|
msgid "Because of GRAMPS internationalization ability, the default character set for the HTML pages is UTF-8. This provides support for virtually all characters."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5585(para)
|
|
msgid "The Apache web server is sometimes misconfigured to override the character set specified in an HTML page. This causes problems with the UTF-8 character set generated by GRAMPS, distorting characters on the screen."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5590(para)
|
|
msgid "If your web server is misconfigured and you do not have priveledge to fix the configururation, you may solve this problem by overriding the default character set to match what your web server may be expecting."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5598(term)
|
|
msgid "Copyright notice"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5601(para)
|
|
msgid "International copyright law reserves all rights to your data. You own the data, and people must get your permission to use it. In genealogy, however, sharing data is a common ideal. It this case, you may wish to grant the user more rights."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5607(para)
|
|
msgid "While the default for GRAMPS is to place a notice indicating that all rights are reserved, we give you the option to place your site under one of several of the Create Commons licenses. With a Creative Commons license, you grant user's certain permission to use your data without requiring them to contact you directly for permission."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5614(para)
|
|
msgid "See the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://creativecommons.org/\">Creative Commons</ulink> web site for more information."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5621(term)
|
|
msgid "Controlling page generation"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5624(para)
|
|
msgid "Three additional pages can be generated by the web page generator. The Home page is a page that will display an image and a whatever text you wish. To enable this page, choose a Media Object from the <guilabel>Home Media/Note ID</guilabel> menu on the <guilabel>Page Generation</guilabel> tab. If the Media Object contains an image, the image is displayed at the top of the page. If the Media Object contains a Note, the Note's text is used for the text of the page. A second page, the Introduction page, works similarly. Just choose the Media Object in the <guilabel>Introduction Media/Note ID</guilabel> menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5636(para)
|
|
msgid "If you choose to include a contact page, the researcher information stored in the database is displayed, along with the information specified in the <guilabel>Publisher contact/Note ID</guilabel> menu. Please use this page with caution, since you may consider your contact information to be private."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5646(term)
|
|
msgid "Privacy"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5649(para)
|
|
msgid "Privacy of personal information is an important issue on the web today. GRAMPS tries to give you control over the information that is presented."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5653(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS provides two options to control the privacy of your information. If you select the <guilabel>Do not include records marked private</guilabel> option, any data that is marked as private will not be displayed on the generated site. If you select <guilabel>Restrict information on living people</guilabel>, GRAMPS will attempt to determine which people have the potential of still being alive, and will omit these people from the database. Some countries have laws that indicate that a certain number of years must pass after someone's death before information can be published. The <guilabel>Years to restrict from person's death</guilabel> option allows you to specifiy how many years a person must be deceased before the information is included."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5667(para)
|
|
msgid "Please note that it is your responsibility to double check all information in the pages for any privacy information. GRAMPS cannot be held responsible for any privacy issues."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5675(term)
|
|
msgid "Adding custom code your pages"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5678(para)
|
|
msgid "If you are not interested in customizing your pages, you may skip the section."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5681(para)
|
|
msgid "The previous web generator allowed you to customize your pages using HTML templates. Your data would be substituted for certain markers in the code."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5685(para)
|
|
msgid "This method proved to be too cumbersome for most users. The Narrative Web Page Generator introduces a simpler mechanism. On the <guilabel>Page Generation</guilabel> tab, you may specify text (including HTML code) that will be inserted into each page, separately for the header and the footer."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5692(para)
|
|
msgid "To create this code, you need to create a Media Object marked as an internal note. To create this, add a new Media Object in the Media View, and select the internal note option. You may then enter your HTML code."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5697(para)
|
|
msgid "To insert the code from the internal notes into the web pages, select the appropriate Media Objects from the <guilabel>HTML user header</guilabel> and <guilabel>HTML user footer</guilabel> menus. Two div sections will be added to the pages - userheader and userfooter. The corresponding HTML code is inserted into the HTML page surrounded by div markers. You can customize your style sheet to provide additional formatting and positioning information to control these sections."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5716(title)
|
|
msgid "Running Tools"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5718(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS tools allow you to perform various types of analysis of your genealogical data. Typically, the tools do not produce output in form of printouts or files. Instead, they produce screen output immediately available for the researcher. However, when appropriate, you can save the results of running a tool into a file. Tools present one of the major strengths of GRAMPS compared to the most genealogical software."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5726(para)
|
|
msgid "The tools can be accessed through the menu by choosing <menuchoice><guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guisubmenu><replaceable>Tool Section</replaceable></guisubmenu><guimenuitem><replaceable>Particular Tool</replaceable></guimenuitem></menuchoice>. Alternatively, you can browse the complete selection of available tools along with their brief descriptions in a <guilabel>Tool Selection</guilabel> dialog invoked by clicking the <guibutton>Tools</guibutton> icon on the toolbar."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5741(title)
|
|
msgid "Analysis and Exploration"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5743(para)
|
|
msgid "This section contains tools which analyze and explore the database, but do not alter it. The following analysis and exploration tools are currently available in GRAMPS:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5749(term)
|
|
msgid "Compare individual events"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5752(para)
|
|
msgid "This tool compares events across the selected group of people. The people for this comparison are chosen with the use of custom filters. The custom filters can be created in the Custom Filter Editor (see <xref linkend=\"tools-util-cfe\"/>) that can be invoked by clicking the <guilabel>Custom Filter Editor</guilabel> button. The resulting table produced by this tool can be saved as a spreadsheet."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5763(term)
|
|
msgid "Interactive descendant browser"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5766(para)
|
|
msgid "This tool builds a tree with the active person being the root. Children branch from their parents in the usual manner. Use this tool for a quick glance of a person's descendants."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5772(para)
|
|
msgid "Double-clicking on tree node will bring up the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog allowing to view or modify the personal data."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5784(title)
|
|
msgid "Database Processing"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5786(para)
|
|
msgid "This section contains tools which may modify your database. The tools from this section are used mostly for finding and correcting errors in the data. The following database processing tools are currently available in GRAMPS:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5792(para)
|
|
msgid "The modifications will only be performed upon your explicit consent, except for the automatic fixes performed by <guilabel>Check and repair database</guilabel> tool."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5799(term)
|
|
msgid "Check and repair database"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5802(para)
|
|
msgid "This tool checks the database for integrity problems, fixing the problems it can. Specifically, the tool is checking for:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5808(para)
|
|
msgid "Broken family links. These are the cases when a person's record refers to a family while the family's record does not refer to that person, and vice versa."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5814(para)
|
|
msgid "Missing media objects. The missing media object is the object whose file is referenced in the database but does not exist. This can happen when the file is accidentally deleted, renamed, or moved to another location."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5821(para)
|
|
msgid "Empty families. These are the family entries which have no reference to any person as their member."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5826(para)
|
|
msgid "Parent relationship. This checks all families to ensure that father and mother are not mixed up. The check is also made that parents have different gender. If they have common gender then their relationship is renamed to \"Partners\"."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5837(term)
|
|
msgid "Extract information from names"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5840(para)
|
|
msgid "This tool searches the entire database and attempts to extract titles and nicknames that may be embedded in a person's <guilabel>Given name</guilabel> field. If any information could be extracted, the candidates for fixing will be presented in the table. You may then decide which to repair as suggested and which not to."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5850(term)
|
|
msgid "Find possible duplicate people"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5853(para)
|
|
msgid "This tool searches the entire database, looking for the entries that may represent the same person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5859(term)
|
|
msgid "Fix capitalization of family names"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5862(para)
|
|
msgid "This tool searches the entire database and attempts to fix the capitalization of family names. The aim is to have conventional capitalization: capital first letter and lower case for the rest of the family name. If deviations from this rule are detected, the candidates for fixing will be presented in the table. You may then decide which to repair as suggested and which not to."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5873(term)
|
|
msgid "Rename personal event types"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5876(para)
|
|
msgid "This tool allows all the events of a certain name to be renamed to a new name."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5882(term)
|
|
msgid "Reorder GRAMPS IDs"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5885(para)
|
|
msgid "This tool reorders the GRAMPS IDs according to the defaults of GRAMPS."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5895(title)
|
|
msgid "Debug"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5897(para)
|
|
msgid "This section contains debugging tools that are not of general interest for many of the users of GRAMPS. If you're not interested in debugging or developing GRAMPS you may safely skip this section."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5904(term)
|
|
msgid "Python evaluation window"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5907(para)
|
|
msgid "Enter expression into the <guilabel>Evaluation Window</guilabel>, get the output in <guilabel>Output Window</guilabel>. Any errors should end up in the <guilabel>Error Window</guilabel>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5915(term)
|
|
msgid "Reload plugins"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5918(para)
|
|
msgid "Makes an attempt to reload all plugins."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5921(para)
|
|
msgid "This tool is itself a plugin, but it will not reload itself!"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5928(term)
|
|
msgid "Show uncollected objects"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5931(para)
|
|
msgid "Provides the window listing all uncollected objects. Depending on the system settings, recently abandoned GUI objects may still be uncollected."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5942(title)
|
|
msgid "Utilities"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5944(para)
|
|
msgid "This section contains tools allowing you to perform a simple operation on a portion of data. The results can be saved in your database, but they will not modify your existing data. The following utilities are currently available in GRAMPS:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5950(title)
|
|
msgid "Custom Filter Editor"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5952(para)
|
|
msgid "The Custom Filter Editor builds custom filters that can be used to select people included in reports, exports, and other tools and utilities. This is in fact a very powerful tool in genealogical analysis."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5957(para)
|
|
msgid "When you launch it, the <guilabel>User defined filters</guilabel> dialog appears that lists all the filters (if any) previously defined by you. Click the <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button to define a new filter. Once you have designed your filters, you can edit, test, and delete selected filters using the <guibutton>Edit...</guibutton>, <guibutton>Test...</guibutton>, and <guibutton>Delete</guibutton> buttons, respectively. All the filters displayed in the list will be automatically saved along with your database and will be available with subsequent sessions of GRAMPS."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5969(para)
|
|
msgid "The changes made to the filters only take effect when you click the <guibutton>Apply and close</guibutton> button."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5973(para)
|
|
msgid "Clicking the <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button invokes the following <guilabel>Define filter</guilabel> dialog:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5979(title)
|
|
msgid "Define filter dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5989(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Define filter dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:5997(para)
|
|
msgid "Type the name for your new filter into the <guilabel>Name</guilabel> field. Enter any comment that would help you identify this filter in the future into the <guilabel>Comment</guilabel> field. Add as many rules to the <guilabel>Rule list</guilabel> as you would like to your filter using <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button. If the filter has more than one rule, select one of the <guilabel>Rule operations</guilabel>. This allows you to choose whether all rules must apply, only one (either) rule must apply, or exactly one (either) rule must apply, in order for the filter to generate a match. If your filter has only one rule, this selection has no effect."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6010(para)
|
|
msgid "Check <guilabel>Return values that do not match the filter rules</guilabel> to invert the filter rule. For example, inverting \"has a common ancestor with I1\" rule will match everyone who does not have a common ancestor with that person)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6015(para)
|
|
msgid "Clicking the <guibutton>Add...</guibutton> button invokes the following <guilabel>Add Rule</guilabel> dialog:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6021(title)
|
|
msgid "Add Rule dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6031(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Add Rule dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6039(para)
|
|
msgid "The pane on the left-hand side displays available filter rules arranged by their categories in an expandable tree. For detailed filter rule reference, see <xref linkend=\"append-filtref\"/>. Click on the arrows to fold/unfold the appropriate category. Select the rule from the tree by clicking on its name. The right-hand side displays the name, the description, and the values for the currently selected rule. Once you are satisfied with your rule selection and its values, click <guibutton>OK</guibutton> to add this rule to the rule list of the currently edited filter. Clicking <guibutton>Cancel</guibutton> will abort adding the rule to the filter."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6052(para)
|
|
msgid "A filter you have already designed may be used as a rule for another filter. This gives you nearly infinite flexibility in custom-tailoring your selection criteria that can be later used in most of the exports, reports, and some of the tools (such as comparing individual events)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6061(title)
|
|
msgid "Scratch Pad"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6063(para)
|
|
msgid "This tool provides a temporary note pad to store database records for easy reuse. In short, this is a sort of the copy-and-paste functionality extended from textual objects to other types of records used in GRAMPS."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6069(para)
|
|
msgid "Scratch Pad makes extensive use of drag-and-drop technique."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6073(para)
|
|
msgid "To invoke Scratch Pad, either choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guisubmenu>Utilities</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Scratch Pad</guimenuitem></menuchoice> or click the <guilabel>ScratchPad</guilabel> button on the toolbar. The following window will appear:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6085(title)
|
|
msgid "Scratch Pad tool"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6095(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Add Scratch Pad tool."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6103(para)
|
|
msgid "Scratch Pad supports addresses, attributes (both personal and family), events (both personal and family), names, media objects references, source references, URLs, and of course textual information of notes and comments. To store any type of these records, simply drag the existing record on to the Scratch Pad from the corresponding editor dialog. To reuse the record, drag it from the Scratch Pad on to the corresponding place in the editor, e.g. Address tab, Attribute tab, etc."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6113(para)
|
|
msgid "Some objects are showing the link icon on the left. This indicates that dragging such selection will produce a reference to an existing object, not copy the object itself."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6117(para)
|
|
msgid "For example, the media object file will not be duplicated. Instead, the reference will be made to an existing media object, which will result in the local gallery entry."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6123(para)
|
|
msgid "Scratch Pad storage is persistent within a single GRAMPS session. Closing the window will not lose the stored records. However, exiting GRAMPS will."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6130(title)
|
|
msgid "Other tools"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6134(term)
|
|
msgid "Generate SoundEx codes"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6137(para)
|
|
msgid "This utility generates SoundEx codes for the names of people in the database. Please visit the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.archives.gov/research_room/genealogy/census/soundex.html\">NARA Soundex Indexing page</ulink> to learn more about Soundex Indexing System."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6146(term)
|
|
msgid "Relationship calculator"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6149(para)
|
|
msgid "This utility calculates and displays the relationship of any person to the active person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6155(term)
|
|
msgid "Verify the database"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6158(para)
|
|
msgid "This utility allows you to verify the database based on the set of criteria specified by you."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6162(title)
|
|
msgid "Difference between Verify tool and previously described Check tool"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6165(para)
|
|
msgid "The Check tool detects inconsistencies in the database structure. The Verify tool, however, is detecting the records that do not satisfy your particular criteria."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6170(para)
|
|
msgid "For example, you may want to make sure that nobody in your database had children at the age of 98. Based on common sense, such a record would indicate an error. However, it is not a consistency error in the database. Besides, someone might have a child at the age of 98 (although this rarely happens). The Verify tool will display everything that violates your criteria so that you can check whether the record is erroneous or not. The ultimate decision is yours."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. $Id: gramps-manual.xml 6994 2006-07-05 19:41:59Z dallingham $
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6190(title)
|
|
msgid "Settings"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6193(title)
|
|
msgid "Preferences"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6195(para)
|
|
msgid "Most of the settings in GRAMPS, are configured in the <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel> dialog. To invoke it, choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Preferences...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6206(title)
|
|
msgid "Preferences dialog"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6215(phrase)
|
|
msgid "Shows Preferences dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. ==== End of Figure ====
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6223(para)
|
|
msgid "The pane on the left displays the tree of available option categories. Selecting a tree node will display the corresponding options in the right side of the dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6228(title)
|
|
msgid "Database"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6230(para)
|
|
msgid "This category contains preferences relevant to the database itself. It has the following subcategories:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6240(guilabel)
|
|
msgid "Automatically load last database"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6244(para)
|
|
msgid "Check this box to automatically load the last open database on startup."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6250(guilabel)
|
|
msgid "Family name guessing"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6253(para)
|
|
msgid "This option affects the initial family name of a child when he/she is added to the database."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6257(para)
|
|
msgid "This option only affects the initial family name guessed by GRAMPS when the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog is launched. You can modify that name the way you see fit. Set this option to the value that you will most frequently use, as it will save you a lot of typing."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6265(para)
|
|
msgid "If <guilabel>None</guilabel> is selected, no guessing will be attempted. Selecting <guilabel>Father's surname</guilabel> will use the family name of the father. Selecting <guilabel>Combination of mother's and father's surname</guilabel> will use the father's name followed by the mother's name. Finally, <guilabel>Icelandic style</guilabel> will use the father's given name followed by the \"sson\" suffix (e.g. the son of Edwin will be guessed as Edwinsson)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6281(guilabel)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS IDs"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6284(para)
|
|
msgid "Enter ID prefixes for various kinds of database entries into the corresponding text entry fields."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6288(para)
|
|
msgid "The ID prefixes use formatting conventions common for C, Python, and other programming languages. For example, the %04d expands to an integer, prepended with zeros to have the total width of four digits. If you would like IDs to be 1, 2, 3, etc, simply set the formatting parameter to %d."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6298(guilabel)
|
|
msgid "Researcher Information"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6301(para)
|
|
msgid "Enter your personal information in the corresponding text entry fields. Although GRAMPS requests information about you, this information is used only so that GRAMPS can create valid GEDCOM output files. A valid GEDCOM file requires information about the file's creator. If you choose, you may leave the information empty, however none of your exported GEDCOM files will be valid."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6314(title)
|
|
msgid "Display"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6316(para)
|
|
msgid "This category contains preferences relevant to displaying database records and controls in GRAMPS. It has the following subcategories:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6327(guilabel)
|
|
msgid "Default view"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6330(para)
|
|
msgid "This determines which view will appear when you start GRAMPS. Choose between Person and Family views."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6337(guilabel)
|
|
msgid "Family view style"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6340(para)
|
|
msgid "This selects between the two available styles of the Family view layout. The <guilabel>Left to right</guilabel> style is similar to the Family Tree Maker (tm), while the <guilabel>Top to bottom</guilabel> is similar to the Reunion."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6349(guilabel)
|
|
msgid "Always display the LDS ordinance tabs"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6353(para)
|
|
msgid "Check this box to have LDS ordinance tabs displayed. If you do not know what LDS is then you probably should not check it."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6360(guilabel)
|
|
msgid "Display Tip of the Day"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6363(para)
|
|
msgid "Check this box to have the <guilabel>Tip of the Day</guilabel> dialog appear on every startup. The tips are displayed randomly from the large collection of information bits on GRAMPS."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6369(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Tip of the Day</guilabel> is likely to be useful for new user of GRAMPS."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6379(guilabel)
|
|
msgid "Dates"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6382(para)
|
|
msgid "Select the display format for the dates from the available formats listed in this menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6386(para)
|
|
msgid "Available date display formats are language-specific. Depending on whether or not there is a GRAMPS date displayer available for your language, you may or may not have a lot of choices."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6395(guilabel)
|
|
msgid "Toolbar and Statusbar"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6403(para)
|
|
msgid "Select the desired appearance of the toolbar icons from the menu. Selecting <guilabel>GNOME Settings</guilabel> will use the overall settings selected for your GNOME desktop."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6411(guilabel)
|
|
msgid "Statusbar"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6414(para)
|
|
msgid "Select the desired contents displayed in the statusbar using the radio buttons."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6426(title)
|
|
msgid "Other settings"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6428(para)
|
|
msgid "Besides <guilabel>Preferences</guilabel> dialog, there are other settings available in GRAMPS. For various reasons they have been made more readily accessible, as listed below."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6437(para)
|
|
msgid "The columns of the list views may be added, removed, or reordered in a <guilabel>Column Editor Dialog</guilabel>, see <xref linkend=\"column-editor-fig\"/>. Only checked columns will be shown in the view. To change their order, drag any column to its desired place inside the editor. Clicking <guibutton>OK</guibutton> will reflect the changes in the appropriate view. To invoke <guilabel>Column Editor Dialog</guilabel>, choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Column Editor...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6451(para)
|
|
msgid "The <guilabel>Column Editor</guilabel> is available and works in the same way for all list views. Specifically, it is available for People View, Family View (children list). Sources View, Places View, and Media View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6460(term)
|
|
msgid "Setting Home person"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6463(para)
|
|
msgid "The Home person is the person who becomes active when database opened, when <guibutton>Home</guibutton> button is clicked or the <guimenuitem>Home</guimenuitem> menu item is selected from either <guimenu>Go</guimenu> menu or the right-click context menu anywhere."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6469(para)
|
|
msgid "To set Home person, make the desired person active and then choose <menuchoice><guimenu>Edit</guimenu><guimenuitem>Set Home person...</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6479(term)
|
|
msgid "Adjusting viewing controls"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6482(para)
|
|
msgid "Whether the toolbar, the sidebar, or the filter (People View only) are displayed in the main window is adjusted through the <guimenu>View</guimenu> menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6491(title)
|
|
msgid "Advanced manipulation of settings"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6494(para)
|
|
msgid "The contents of this section is outside the scope of interest of a general user of GRAMPS. If you proceed with tweaking the options on the low level you may damage your GRAMPS installation. Be careful. YOU HAVE BEEN WARNED!"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6500(para)
|
|
msgid "By default, GRAMPS stores its settings using gconf2 system. All the settings used in this version of GRAMPS are stored in subdirectories under <filename>/apps/gramps/</filename> in the gconf2 namespace. Accessing the keys can be done either using <command>gconftool-2</command> command line tool, or the <command>gconf-editor</command> GUI tool."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6507(para)
|
|
msgid "All keys are documented, and the notification mechanisms are used as appropriate. Therefore, updating keys from outside of GRAMPS should lead to updating GRAMPS in real time, without necessarily restarting it."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6517(title)
|
|
msgid "Frequently Asked Questions"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6519(para)
|
|
msgid "This appendix contains the list of questions that frequently come up in mailing list discussions and forums. This list is by no means complete. If you would like to add questions/answers to this list, please email your suggestions to <ulink type=\"mailto\" url=\"mailto:gramps-devel@lists.sf.net\">gramps-devel@lists.sf.net</ulink>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6527(term)
|
|
msgid "What is GRAMPS?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6530(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS is the Genealogical Research and Analysis Management Program System. In other words, it is a personal genealogy program letting you store, edit, and research genealogical data using the powers of your computer."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6538(term)
|
|
msgid "Where do I get it and how much does it cost?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6541(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS can be downloaded from <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://sf.net/projects/gramps\">http://sf.net/projects/gramps</ulink> at no charge. GRAMPS is an Open Source project covered by the GNU General Public License. You have full access to the source code and are allowed to distribute the program and source code freely."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6550(term)
|
|
msgid "Does it work with Windows (tm)?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6553(para)
|
|
msgid "No. GRAMPS uses the GTK and GNOME libraries. While the GTK libraries have been ported to Windows, the GNOME libraries have not. This, however, may change in the future."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6560(term)
|
|
msgid "Does it work with the Mac?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6563(para)
|
|
msgid "<ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://fink.sourceforge.net\"> The Fink project</ulink> has ported <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://fink.sourceforge.net/pdb/package.php/gramps\"> some older versions</ulink> of GRAMPS to OSX (tm). The Mac OSX port is not directly supported by the GRAMPS project, primarily because none of the GRAMPS developers have access to Mac OSX and because OSX is not Free Software."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6571(para)
|
|
msgid "This version of GRAMPS (2.2.0) does not appear to have been ported by the Fink project. Please contact the Fink project for more information."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6575(para)
|
|
msgid "Some people have had success using the DarwinPorts instead of the Fink project."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6581(term)
|
|
msgid "Does it work with KDE?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6584(para)
|
|
msgid "Yes, as long as the required GNOME libraries are installed."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6590(term)
|
|
msgid "Do I really have to have GNOME installed?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6593(para)
|
|
msgid "Yes, but you do not have to be running the GNOME desktop."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6599(term)
|
|
msgid "What version of GNOME do I need?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6602(para)
|
|
msgid "This version of gramps requires GNOME 2.8.0 or higher. Previous versions in 1.0.x series required GNOME 2.0."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6608(term)
|
|
msgid "Is GRAMPS compatible with other genealogical software?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6611(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS makes every effort to maintain compatibility with GEDCOM, the general standard of recording genealogical information. We have import and export filters that enable GRAMPS to read and write GEDCOM files."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6616(para)
|
|
msgid "It is important to understand that the GEDCOM standard is poorly implemented -- virtually every genealogical software has its own \"flavor\" of GEDCOM. As we learn about new flavor, the import/export filters can be created very quickly. However, finding out about the unknown flavors requires user feedback. Please feel free to inform us about any GEDCOM flavor not supported by GRAMPS, and we will do our best to support it!"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6627(term)
|
|
msgid "Can GRAMPS read files created by other genealogy programs?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6631(para) gramps-manual.xml:6640(para)
|
|
msgid "See above."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6636(term)
|
|
msgid "Can GRAMPS write files readable by other genealogy programs?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6645(term)
|
|
msgid "Can GRAMPS print a genealogical tree for my family?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6648(para)
|
|
msgid "Yes. Different people have different ideas of what a genealogical tree is. Some think of it as a chart going from the distant ancestor and listing all his/her descendants and their families. Others think it should be a chart going from the person back in time, listing the ancestors and their families. Yet other people think of a table, text report, etc."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6655(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS can produce any of the above, and many more different charts and reports. Moreover, the plugin architecture enables users (you) to create their own plugins which could be new reports, charts, or research tools."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6663(term)
|
|
msgid "In what formats can GRAMPS output its reports?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6666(para)
|
|
msgid "Text reports are available in HTML, PDF, AbiWord, KWord, LaTeX, RTF, and OpenOffice formats. Graphical reports (charts and diagrams) are available in PostScript, PDF, SVG, OpenOffice, and GraphViz formats."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6674(term)
|
|
msgid "Is GRAMPS compatible with the Internet?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6677(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS can store web addresses and direct your browser to them. It can import data that you download from the Internet. It can export data that you could send over the Internet. GRAMPS is familiar with the standard file formats widely used on the Internet (e.g. JPEG, PNG, and GIF images, MP3, OGG, and WAV sound files, QuickTime, MPEG, and AVI movie files, etc). Other than that, there is little that a genealogical program can do with the Internet."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6689(term)
|
|
msgid "Can I create custom reports/filters/whatever?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6692(para)
|
|
msgid "Yes. There are many levels of customization. One is creating or modifying the templates used for the reports. This gives you some control over the fonts, colors, and some layout of the reports. You can also use GRAMPS controls in the report dialogs to tell what contents should be used for a particular report. In addition to this, you have an ability to create your own filters -- this is useful in selecting people based on criteria set by you. You can combine these filters to create new, more complex filters. Finally, you have an option to create your own plugins. These may be new reports, research tools, import/export filters, etc. This assumes some knowledge of programming in Python."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6707(term)
|
|
msgid "What standards does GRAMPS support?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6710(para)
|
|
msgid "The nice thing about standards is that there never is a shortage of them. GRAMPS is tested to support the following flavors of GEDCOM: GEDCOM5.5, Brother's Keeper, Family Origins, Family Tree Maker, Ftree, GeneWeb, Legacy, Personal Ancestral File, Pro-Gen, Reunion, and Visual Genealogie."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6719(term)
|
|
msgid "What is the maximum database size (bytes) GRAMPS can handle?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6723(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS has no hard limits on the size of a database that it can handle. Starting with this release, GRAMPS no longer loads all data into memory, which allows it to work with a much larger database than before. In reality, however, there are practical limits. The main limiting factors are the available memory on the system and the cache size used for BSDDB database access. With common memory sizes these days, GRAMPS should have no problem using databases with tens of thousands of people."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6735(term)
|
|
msgid "How many people can GRAMPS database handle?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6738(para)
|
|
msgid "We have found that on a typical system, GRAMPS tends to bog down after the database has around 150,000 people. Again, this is dependent on how much memory you have."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6745(term)
|
|
msgid "Why is GRAMPS running so slowly?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6748(para)
|
|
msgid "It does not anymore! Just try out the current version, 2.2.0."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6754(term)
|
|
msgid "My database is really big. Is there a way around loading all the data into memory?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6758(para)
|
|
msgid "Starting with this release, GRAMPS no longer loads all data into memory, which allows it to work with a much larger database than before."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6765(term)
|
|
msgid "I want to rerun the Startup dialog. How do I do this?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6768(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS keeps a flag in the GNOME configuration database to indicate that the startup dialog has been run. To cause GRAMPS to rerun this, the flag needs to be reset. This can be done with the following command:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6773(command)
|
|
msgid "gconftool-2 -u /apps/gramps/behavior/startup"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6779(term)
|
|
msgid "Why are non-latin characters displayed as garbage in PDF/PS reports?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6783(para)
|
|
msgid "This is a limitation of the builtin fonts of PS and PDF formats. To print non-latin text, use the Print... in the format selection menu of the report dialog. This will use the gnome-print backend, which supports PS and PDF creation, as well as direct printing."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6789(para)
|
|
msgid "If you only have latin text, the PDF option will produce a smalled PDF compared to that created by gnome-print, simply because no font information will be embedded."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6796(term)
|
|
msgid "Why can I not add/remove/edit columns to the lists in People View and Family View?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6800(para)
|
|
msgid "Now you can! Just try out the current version, 2.2.0."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6805(term)
|
|
msgid "I would like to contribute to GRAMPS by writing my favorite report. How do I do that?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6809(para)
|
|
msgid "The easiest way to contribute to reports, filters, tools, etc. is to copy an existing GRAMPS report, filter, or tool. If you can create what you want by modifying existing code -- great! If your idea does not fit into the logic of any existing GRAMPS tool, the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://gramps.sourceforge.net/phpwiki/index.php/GrampsDevelopersPage\">following page</ulink> may provide some help in writing your own plugin from scratch."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6818(para)
|
|
msgid "If you need more help or would like to discuss your idea with us, please do not hesitate to contact us at <ulink type=\"mailto\" url=\"mailto:gramps-devel@lists.sf.net\">gramps-devel@lists.sf.net</ulink>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6822(para)
|
|
msgid "To test your work in progress, you may save your plugin under <replaceable>$HOME/.gramps/plugins</replaceable> directory and it should be found and imported on startup. The correctly written plugin will register itself with GRAMPS, create menu item, and so on."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6828(para)
|
|
msgid "If you are happy with your plugin and would like to contribute your code back to the GRAMPS project, you are very welcome to do so by contacting us at <ulink type=\"mailto\" url=\"mailto:gramps-devel@lists.sf.net\">gramps-devel@lists.sf.net</ulink>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6836(term)
|
|
msgid "I found a bug and I want it fixed right now! What do I do?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6840(para)
|
|
msgid "The best thing you can do is to fix the bug and send the patch to <ulink type=\"mailto\" url=\"mailto:gramps-devel@lists.sf.net\">gramps-devel@lists.sf.net</ulink> :-)"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6845(para)
|
|
msgid "A good bug report would include:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6849(para)
|
|
msgid "Version of gramps you were using when you encountered the bug (available through <menuchoice><guisubmenu>Help</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>About</guimenuitem></menuchoice> menu item)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6858(para)
|
|
msgid "Language under which gramps was run (available by executing"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6861(command)
|
|
msgid "echo $LANG"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6863(para)
|
|
msgid "in your terminal)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6867(para)
|
|
msgid "Symptoms indicating that this is indeed a bug."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6871(para)
|
|
msgid "Any Traceback messages, error messages, warnings, etc, that showed up in your terminal or a in separate traceback window."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6877(para)
|
|
msgid "Most problems can be fixed quickly provided there is enough information. To ensure this, please follow up on your bug reports. In particular, if you file a bug report with sf.net bug tracker, PLEASE log in to sf.net before filing (register your free account if you don't have one). Then we will have a way of contacting you should we need more information. If you choose to file your report anonymously, at least check every so often whether your report page has something new posted, as it probably would."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6886(para)
|
|
msgid "If the above explanations seem vague, please follow <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/bugs.html\">this link.</ulink>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6894(term)
|
|
msgid "It is obvious that GRAMPS absolutely needs to become a (client-server/web-based/PHP/weblog/Javascript/C++/distributed/KDE/Motif/Tcl/Win32/C#/You-name-it) application. When is this going to happen?"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6899(para)
|
|
msgid "The surest way to see it happen is to get it done by yourself. Since GRAMPS is free/open source, nobody prevents you from taking all of the code and continuing its development in whatever direction you see fit. In doing so, you may consider giving your new project another name to avoid confusion with the continuing GRAMPS development. If you would like the GRAMPS project to provide advice, expertise, filters, etc., we will gladly cooperate with your new project, to ensure compatibility or import/export options to your new format of a project."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6909(para)
|
|
msgid "If, however, you would like the GRAMPS project to to adopt your strategy, you would need to convince GRAMPS developers that your strategy is good for GRAMPS and superior to the present development strategy."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. $Id: gramps-manual.xml 6994 2006-07-05 19:41:59Z dallingham $
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6921(title)
|
|
msgid "Keybindings reference"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6923(para)
|
|
msgid "Most of the standard menu items define equivalent keybindings. These are apparent because they are displayed on the right of the menu item. However, some keybindings are not associated with any items in the menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6928(para)
|
|
msgid "This appendix contains the list of keybindings that are not displayed in menus of GRAMPS."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6932(title)
|
|
msgid "List Views"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6934(para)
|
|
msgid "The following bindings are available in all list views: People View, Sources View, Places View, and Media View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6946(para) gramps-manual.xml:6985(para) gramps-manual.xml:7030(para) gramps-manual.xml:7103(para) gramps-manual.xml:7172(para)
|
|
msgid "Key"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6948(para) gramps-manual.xml:6988(para) gramps-manual.xml:7033(para) gramps-manual.xml:7106(para) gramps-manual.xml:7175(para)
|
|
msgid "Function"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6954(keycap) gramps-manual.xml:6994(keycap) gramps-manual.xml:7039(keycap) gramps-manual.xml:7112(keycap) gramps-manual.xml:7181(keycap)
|
|
msgid "Enter"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6956(para)
|
|
msgid "Invoke <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog with the selected person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6965(title)
|
|
msgid "Family View"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6967(para)
|
|
msgid "The bindings available in the Family View depend on where the focus is. The following tables list the bindings for all focus targets."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6973(term)
|
|
msgid "Focus on the Active Person"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:6996(para)
|
|
msgid "Invoke <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog with the active person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7001(para)
|
|
msgid "<keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Down</keycap> or <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Right</keycap>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7005(para)
|
|
msgid "Swap the Active Person and the selected spouse. Use <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Down</keycap> in standard Family View and <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Right</keycap> in alternative Family View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7018(term)
|
|
msgid "Focus on the Spouse box"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7041(para)
|
|
msgid "Edit relationship between the Active Person and the selected spouse."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7046(para) gramps-manual.xml:7189(para)
|
|
msgid "<keycap>Shift</keycap>+<keycap>Enter</keycap>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7048(para)
|
|
msgid "Edit the personal information for the selected spouse."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7053(keycap) gramps-manual.xml:7121(keycap) gramps-manual.xml:7196(keycap)
|
|
msgid "Insert"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7055(para)
|
|
msgid "Add a person from the database to the spouse list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7060(para) gramps-manual.xml:7128(para) gramps-manual.xml:7203(para)
|
|
msgid "<keycap>Shift</keycap>+<keycap>Insert</keycap>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7062(para)
|
|
msgid "Add a new person to the database and to the spouse list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7067(keycap) gramps-manual.xml:7135(keycap) gramps-manual.xml:7210(keycap)
|
|
msgid "Delete"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7069(para)
|
|
msgid "Delete the selected spouse from the spouse list. The spouse is not deleted from the database."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7075(para)
|
|
msgid "<keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Up</keycap> or <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Left</keycap>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7078(para)
|
|
msgid "Swap the selected spouse and the Active Person. Use <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Up</keycap> in standard Family View and <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Left</keycap> in alternative Family View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7091(term)
|
|
msgid "Focus on the Parents box"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7114(para)
|
|
msgid "Edit relationship between the parents and their child (either the Active Person or the selected spouse, depending which parents box the focus is in)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7123(para)
|
|
msgid "Add a new set of parents from the database to the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7130(para)
|
|
msgid "Add a new set of parents to the database and to the list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7137(para)
|
|
msgid "Delete the selected parents from the list. The parents are not deleted from the database."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7143(para)
|
|
msgid "<keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Right</keycap> or <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Down</keycap>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7147(para)
|
|
msgid "Make the selected parents the active family. Use <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Right</keycap> in standard Family View and <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Down</keycap> in alternative Family View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7160(term)
|
|
msgid "Focus on the Children box"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7183(para)
|
|
msgid "Edit relationship between the child and his/her parents (the Active Person and the selected spouse)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7191(para)
|
|
msgid "Edit the personal information for the selected child."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7198(para)
|
|
msgid "Add a new person from the database to the children list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7205(para)
|
|
msgid "Add a new person to the database and to the children list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7212(para)
|
|
msgid "Delete the selected child from the list. The child is not deleted from the database."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7217(para)
|
|
msgid "<keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Left</keycap> or <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Up</keycap>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7221(para)
|
|
msgid "Make the selected child the Active Person. Use <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Left</keycap> in standard Family View and <keycap>Ctrl</keycap>+<keycap>Up</keycap> in alternative Family View."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. $Id: gramps-manual.xml 6994 2006-07-05 19:41:59Z dallingham $
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7239(title)
|
|
msgid "Filter rules reference"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7241(para)
|
|
msgid "This appendix lists of all the filter rules currently defined in GRAMPS. Each of these rules is available for use when creating custom filters, see <xref linkend=\"tools-util-cfe\"/>. The rules are listed by their categories."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7249(title)
|
|
msgid "General filters"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7251(para)
|
|
msgid "This category includes the following most general rules:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7255(term)
|
|
msgid "Has complete record"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7258(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches all people whose records are marked as complete. Currently, the completeness of personal information is marked manually, in the <guilabel>Edit Person</guilabel> dialog."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7266(term)
|
|
msgid "People with incomplete names"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7269(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches all people with either given name or family name missing."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7275(term)
|
|
msgid "Is bookmarked person"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7278(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches all people who are on the bookmark list."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7284(term)
|
|
msgid "Has text matching substring of"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7287(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches all people whose records contain specified substring. All textual records are searched. Optionally, the search can be made case sensitive, or a regular expression match."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7295(term)
|
|
msgid "Everyone"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7298(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches any person in the database. As such it is not very useful on its own except for testing purposes. However, it may be useful in combinations with other rules."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7305(term)
|
|
msgid "People probably alive"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7308(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches all people whose records do not indicate their death and who are not unreasonably old, judging by their available birth data and today's date."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7315(term)
|
|
msgid "Has a name"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7318(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches any person whose name matches the specified value in full or in part. For example, Marta Ericsdotter will be matched by the rule using the value \"eric\" for the family name."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7323(para)
|
|
msgid "Separate values can be used for Given name, Family name, Suffix, and the Title. The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's name. To use just one value, leave the other values empty."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7331(term)
|
|
msgid "Has the Id"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7334(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches any person with a specified GRAMPS ID. The rule returns a match only if the ID is matched exactly."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7337(para) gramps-manual.xml:7633(para) gramps-manual.xml:7716(para)
|
|
msgid "You can either enter the ID into a text entry field, or select a person from the list by clicking <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> button. In the latter case, the ID will appear in the text field after the selection was made."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7346(term)
|
|
msgid "Is default person"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7349(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches the default (home) person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7354(term)
|
|
msgid "People marked private"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7357(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people whose records are marked as private."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7363(term)
|
|
msgid "Is a female"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7366(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches any female person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7371(term)
|
|
msgid "People who have images"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7374(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people with images in their galleries."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7380(term)
|
|
msgid "People without a birth date"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7383(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people missing birth date."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7388(term)
|
|
msgid "Is a male"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7391(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches any male person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7400(title)
|
|
msgid "Event filters"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7402(para)
|
|
msgid "This category includes the following rules that match people based on their recorded events:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7407(term)
|
|
msgid "Has the birth"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7410(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people whose birth event matches specified values for Date, Place, and Description. The rule returns a match even if the person's birth event matches the value partially. The matching rules are case-insensitive. For example, anyone born in Sweden will be matched by the rule using the value \"sw\" for the Place."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7417(para)
|
|
msgid "The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's birth. To use just one value, leave the other values empty."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7424(term)
|
|
msgid "Has the death"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7427(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people whose death event matches specified values for Date, Place, and Description. The rule returns a match even if the person's death event matches the value partially. The matching rules are case-insensitive. For example, anyone who died in Sweden will be matched by the rule using the value \"sw\" for the Place."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7434(para)
|
|
msgid "The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's death. To use just one value, leave the other values empty."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7441(term)
|
|
msgid "Has source of"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7444(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people whose records refer to the specified source."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7450(term)
|
|
msgid "Has the personal event"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7453(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people that have a personal event matching specified values for the Event type, Date, Place, and Description. The rule returns a match even if the person's event matches the value partially. The matching rules are case-insensitive. For example, anyone who graduated in Sweden will be matched by the rule using the Graduation event and the value \"sw\" for the Place."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7461(para)
|
|
msgid "The personal events should be selected from a pull-down menu. The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty values are (partially) matched by the personal event. To use just one value, leave the other values empty."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7469(term)
|
|
msgid "Has the family event"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7472(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people that have a family event matching specified values for the Event type, Date, Place, and Description. The rule returns a match even if the person's event matches the value partially. The matching rules are case-insensitive. For example, anyone who was married in Sweden will be matched by the rule using the Marriage event and the value \"sw\" for the Place."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7480(para)
|
|
msgid "The family events should be selected from a pull-down menu. The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty values are (partially) matched by the personal event. To use just one value, leave the other values empty."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7488(term)
|
|
msgid "Witness"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7491(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people who are present as a witness in the event. If the personal or family event type is specified, only the events of this type will be searched."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7498(term)
|
|
msgid "People with incomplete events"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7501(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people missing date or place in any personal event."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7507(term)
|
|
msgid "Families with incomplete events"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7510(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people missing date or place in any family event of any of their families."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7520(title)
|
|
msgid "Family filters"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7522(para)
|
|
msgid "This category includes the following rules that match people based on their family relationships:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7527(term)
|
|
msgid "People with children"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7530(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people with children."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7535(term)
|
|
msgid "People with multiple marriage records"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7538(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people with more than one spouse."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7543(term)
|
|
msgid "People with no marriage records"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7546(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people with no spouses."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7551(term)
|
|
msgid "People who were adopted"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7554(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches adopted people."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7559(term)
|
|
msgid "Has the relationships"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7562(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people with a particular relationship. The relationship must match the type selected from the menu. Optionally, the number of relationships and the number of children can be specified."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7567(para)
|
|
msgid "The rule returns a match if, and only if, all non-empty values are (partially) matched by a person's relationship. To use just one value, leave the other values empty."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7574(term)
|
|
msgid "Is spouse of filter match"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7577(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people married to someone who is matched by the specified filter. The specified filter name should be selected from the menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7584(term)
|
|
msgid "Is a child of filter match"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7587(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people for whom either parent is matched by the specified filter. The specified filter name should be selected from the menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7594(term)
|
|
msgid "Is a parent of filter match"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7597(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people whose child is matched by the specified filter. The specified filter name should be selected from the menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7604(term)
|
|
msgid "Is a sibling of filter match"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7607(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people whose sibling is matched by the specified filter. The specified filter name should be selected from the menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7618(title)
|
|
msgid "Ancestral filters"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7620(para)
|
|
msgid "This category includes the following rules that match people based on their ancestral relations to other people:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7625(term)
|
|
msgid "Is an ancestor of"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7628(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people who are ancestors of the specified person. The Inclusive option determines whether the specified person should be considered his/her own ancestor (useful for building reports)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7642(term)
|
|
msgid "Is an ancestor of person at least N generations away"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7645(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people who are ancestors of the specified person and are at least N generations away from that person in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value of 2 for the number of generations will match grandparents, great-grandparents, etc., but not the parents of the specified person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7655(term)
|
|
msgid "Is an ancestor of person not more than N generations away"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7659(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people who are ancestors of the specified person and are no more than N generations away from that person in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value of 2 for the number of generations will match parents and grandparents, but not great-grandparents, etc., of the specified person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7668(term)
|
|
msgid "Has a common ancestor with"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7671(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people who have common ancestors with the specified person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7677(term)
|
|
msgid "Has a common ancestor with filter match"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7680(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people who have common ancestors with someone who is matched by the specified filter. The specified filter name should be selected from the menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7687(term)
|
|
msgid "Is an ancestor of filter match"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7690(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people who are ancestors of someone who is matched by the specified filter. The specified filter name should be selected from the menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7701(title)
|
|
msgid "Descendant filters"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7703(para)
|
|
msgid "This category includes the following rules that match people based on their descendant relations to other people:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7708(term)
|
|
msgid "Is a descendant of"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7711(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people who are descendants of the specified person. The Inclusive option determines whether the specified person should be considered his/her own descendant (useful for building reports)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7725(term)
|
|
msgid "Is a descendant of person at least N generations away"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7728(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people who are descendants of the specified person and are at least N generations away from that person in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value of 2 for the number of generations will match grandchildren, great-grandchildren, etc., but not the children of the specified person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7738(term)
|
|
msgid "Is a descendant of person not more than N generations away"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7742(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people who are descendants of the specified person and are no more than N generations away from that person in their lineage. For example, using this rule with the value of 2 for the number of generations will match children and grandchildren, but not great-grandchildren, etc., of the specified person."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7752(term)
|
|
msgid "Is a descendant of filter match"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7755(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people who are descendants of someone who is matched by the specified filter. The specified filter name should be selected from the menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7762(term)
|
|
msgid "Is a descendant family member of"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7765(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule not only matches people who are descendants of the specified person, but also those descendants' spouses."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7775(title)
|
|
msgid "Relationship filters"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7777(para)
|
|
msgid "This category includes the following rules that match people based on their mutual relationship:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7782(term)
|
|
msgid "Relationship path between two people"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7785(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches all ancestors of both people back to their common ancestors (if exist). This produces the \"relationship path\" between these two people, through their common ancestors."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7789(para)
|
|
msgid "You can either enter the ID of each person into the appropriate text entry fields, or select people from the list by clicking their <guibutton>Select...</guibutton> buttons. In the latter case, the ID will appear in the text field after the selection was made."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7802(title)
|
|
msgid "Miscellaneous filters"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7804(para)
|
|
msgid "This category includes the following rules which do not naturally fit into any of the above categories:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7809(term)
|
|
msgid "Has the personal attribute"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7812(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people who have the personal attribute of the specified value. The specified personal attribute name should be selected from the menu. The specified value should be typed into the text entry field."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7820(term)
|
|
msgid "Has the family attribute"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7823(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people who have the family attribute of the specified value. The specified family attribute should be selected from the menu. The specified value should be typed into the text entry field."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7831(term)
|
|
msgid "Matches the filter named"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7834(para)
|
|
msgid "This rule matches people who are matched by the specified filter. The specified filter name should be selected from the menu."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. =============== Appendices Subsection ================
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7848(title)
|
|
msgid "Command line reference"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7850(para)
|
|
msgid "This appendix provides the reference to the command line capabilities available when launching GRAMPS from the terminal."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7854(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS was designed to be an interactive program. Therefore it uses graphical display and cannot run from the true non-graphical console. It would take an enormous amount of effort to enable it to run in a text-only terminal. This is why the set of command line options does not aim to completely get rid of dependency on the graphical display. Rather, it merely makes certain (typical) tasks more convenient. It also allows one to execute these tasks from the scripts. However, the graphical display must be accessible at all times!"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7865(para)
|
|
msgid "To summarize, the use of the command line options provides non-interactive behavior, but does not get rid of graphical display dependency. Take it or leave it!"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7871(title)
|
|
msgid "Available options"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7873(para)
|
|
msgid "This section provides the reference list of all command line options available in GRAMPS. If you want to know more than just a list of options, see next sections: <xref linkend=\"cmdline-operation\"/> and <xref linkend=\"cmdline-examples\"/>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7879(title)
|
|
msgid "Format options"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7881(para)
|
|
msgid "The format of any file destined for opening, importing, or exporting can be specified with the <command>-f <replaceable>format</replaceable></command> option. The acceptable <replaceable>format</replaceable> values are listed below."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7888(term)
|
|
msgid "grdb"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7891(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS database. This format is available for opening, import, and export. When not specified, it can be guessed if the filename ends with .grdb"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7898(term) gramps-manual.xml:8289(replaceable)
|
|
msgid "gramps-xml"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7901(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS XML database. This format is available for opening, import, and export. When not specified, it can be guessed if the filename ends with .gramps"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7908(term) gramps-manual.xml:8285(replaceable)
|
|
msgid "gedcom"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7911(para)
|
|
msgid "GEDCOM file. This format is available for opening, import, and export. When not specified, it can be guessed if the filename ends with .ged"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7918(term) gramps-manual.xml:8287(replaceable) gramps-manual.xml:8304(replaceable) gramps-manual.xml:8317(replaceable)
|
|
msgid "gramps-pkg"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7921(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS package. This format is available for import and export. When not specified, it can be guessed if the filename ends with .gpkg"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7928(term)
|
|
msgid "geneweb"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7931(para)
|
|
msgid "GeneWen file This format is available for import and export. When not specified, it can be guessed if the filename ends with .gw"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7938(term) gramps-manual.xml:8290(replaceable)
|
|
msgid "wft"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7941(para)
|
|
msgid "Web Family Tree. This format is available for export only. When not specified, it can be guessed if the filename ends with .wft"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7948(term)
|
|
msgid "iso"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7951(para)
|
|
msgid "CD image. This format is available for export only. It must always be specified explicitly."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7959(title)
|
|
msgid "Opening options"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7961(para)
|
|
msgid "There are two ways to give GRAMPS the name of the file to be opened:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7966(para)
|
|
msgid "supply bare file name"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7970(para)
|
|
msgid "use the <command>-O <filename>filename</filename></command> or <command>-open=<filename>filename</filename></command> option"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7976(para)
|
|
msgid "If the filename is given without any option flag, the attempt to open the file will be made, and then the interactive GRAMPS session will be launched."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7981(para)
|
|
msgid "If no option is given, just the file name, GRAMPS will ignore the rest of the command line arguments. Use the -O flag to open the file and do something with the data."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7986(para)
|
|
msgid "The format can be specified with the <command>-f <replaceable>format</replaceable></command> or <command>--format=<replaceable>format</replaceable></command> option, immediately following the <filename>filename</filename>. If not specified, the guess will be attempted based on the <filename>filename</filename>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:7994(para)
|
|
msgid "Only grdb, gramps-xml, and gedcom formats can be opened directly. For other formats, you will need to use the import option which will set up the empty database and then import data into it."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8001(para)
|
|
msgid "Only a single file can be opened. If you need to combine data from several sources, you will need to use the import option."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8007(title)
|
|
msgid "Import options"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8009(para)
|
|
msgid "The files destined for import can be specified with the <command>-i <filename>filename</filename></command> or <command>--import=<filename>filename</filename></command> option. The format can be specified with the <command>-f <replaceable>format</replaceable></command> or <command>--format=<replaceable>format</replaceable></command> option, immediately following the <filename>filename</filename>. If not specified, the guess will be attempted based on the <filename>filename</filename>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8020(para)
|
|
msgid "More than one file can be imported in one command. If this is the case, GRAMPS will incorporate the data from the next file into the database available at the moment."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8025(para)
|
|
msgid "When more than one input file is given, each has to be preceded by <command>-i</command> flag. The files are imported in the specified order, i.e. <command> -i <filename>file1</filename> -i <filename>file2</filename></command> and <command> -i <filename>file2</filename> -i <filename>file1</filename></command> might produce different GRAMPS IDs in the resulting database."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8034(title)
|
|
msgid "Export options"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8036(para)
|
|
msgid "The files destined for export can be specified with the <command>-o <filename>filename</filename></command> or <command>--output=<filename>filename</filename></command> option. The format can be specified with the <command>-f</command> option immediately following the <filename>filename</filename>. If not specified, the guess will be attempted based on the <filename>filename</filename>. For iso format, the <filename>filename</filename> is actually the name of directory the GRAMPS database will be written into. For grdb, gramps-xml, gedcom, wft, geneweb, and gramps-pkg, the <filename>filename</filename> is the name of the resulting file."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8049(para)
|
|
msgid "More than one file can be exported in one command. If this is the case, GRAMPS will attempt to write several files using the data from the database available at the moment."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8054(para)
|
|
msgid "When more than one output file is given, each has to be preceded by <command>-o</command> flag. The files are written one by one, in the specified order."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8060(title)
|
|
msgid "Action options"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8062(para)
|
|
msgid "The action to perform on the imported data can be specified with the <command>-a <replaceable>action</replaceable></command> or <command>--action=<replaceable>action</replaceable></command> option. This is done after all imports are successfully completed."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8067(para)
|
|
msgid "Currently available actions are:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8071(term)
|
|
msgid "summary"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8074(para)
|
|
msgid "This action is the same as <menuchoice><guimenu>Reports</guimenu><guisubmenu>View</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Summary</guimenuitem></menuchoice>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8085(term) gramps-manual.xml:8275(filename) gramps-manual.xml:8291(replaceable)
|
|
msgid "check"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8088(para)
|
|
msgid "This action is the same as <menuchoice><guimenu>Tools</guimenu><guisubmenu>Database Processing</guisubmenu><guimenuitem>Check and Repair</guimenuitem></menuchoice>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8099(term) gramps-manual.xml:8341(replaceable)
|
|
msgid "report"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8102(para)
|
|
msgid "This action allows producing reports from the command line. As reports generally have many options of their own, this action should be followed by the report option string. The string is given using the <command>-p <replaceable>option_string</replaceable></command> or <command>--options=<replaceable>option_string</replaceable></command> option."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8111(para)
|
|
msgid "The report option string should satisfy the following conditions:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8116(para)
|
|
msgid "It must not contain any spaces. If some arguments need to include spaces, the string should be enclosed with quotation marks."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8122(para)
|
|
msgid "Option string must list pairs of option names and values."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8127(para)
|
|
msgid "Within a pair, option name and value must be separated by the equal sign."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8132(para)
|
|
msgid "Different pairs must be separated by commas."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8137(para)
|
|
msgid "Most of the report options are specific for every report. However, there some common options."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8142(term)
|
|
msgid "name=report_name"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8145(para)
|
|
msgid "This mandatory option determines which report will be generated. If the supplied report_name does not correspond to any available report, the error message will be printed followed by the list of available reports."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8154(term)
|
|
msgid "show=all"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8157(para)
|
|
msgid "This will produce the list of names for all options available for a given report."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8163(term)
|
|
msgid "show=option_name"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8166(para)
|
|
msgid "This will print the description of the functionality supplied by the option_name, as well as what are the acceptable types and values for this option."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8173(para)
|
|
msgid "Use the above options to find out everything about a given report."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8177(para)
|
|
msgid "If an option is not supplied, the last used value will be used. If this report has never been generated before, then the value from last generated report will be used when applicable. Otherwise, the default value will be used."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8186(para)
|
|
msgid "When more than one output action is given, each has to be preceded by <command>-a</command> flag. The actions are performed one by one, in the specified order."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8195(title)
|
|
msgid "Operation"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8199(para)
|
|
msgid "If the first argument on the command line does not start with dash (i.e. no flag), GRAMPS will attempt to open the file with the name given by the first argument and start interactive session, ignoring the rest of the command line arguments."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8206(para)
|
|
msgid "If the <command>-O</command> flag is given, then GRAMPS will try opening the supplied file name and then work with that data, as instructed by the further command line parameters."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8211(para)
|
|
msgid "Only one file can be opened in a single invocation of GRAMPS. If you need to get data from multiple sources, use the importing options by using <command>-i</command> flag."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8218(para)
|
|
msgid "With or without the <command>-O</command> flag, there could be multiple imports, exports, and actions specified further on the command line by using <command>-i</command>, <command>-o</command>, and <command>-a</command> flags."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8225(para)
|
|
msgid "The order of <command>-i</command>, <command>-o</command>, or <command>-a</command> options with respect to each does not matter. The actual execution order always is: all imports (if any) -> all exports (if any) -> all actions (if any)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8231(para)
|
|
msgid "But opening must always be first!"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8236(para)
|
|
msgid "If no <command>-O</command> or <command>-i</command> option is given, GRAMPS will launch its main window and start the usual interactive session with the empty database, since there is no data to process, anyway."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8243(para)
|
|
msgid "If no <command>-o</command> or <command>-a</command> options are given, GRAMPS will launch its main window and start the usual interactive session with the database resulted from opening and all imports (if any). This database resides in the <filename>import_db.grdb</filename> file under the <filename>~/.gramps/import/</filename> directory."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8252(para)
|
|
msgid "Any errors encountered during import, export, or action, will be either dumped to stdout (if these are exceptions handled by GRAMPS) or or to stderr (if these are not handled). Use usual shell redirections of stdout and stderr to save messages and errors in files."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8262(title)
|
|
msgid "Examples"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8266(term)
|
|
msgid "To import four databases (whose formats can be determined from their names) and then check the resulting database for errors, one may type:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8271(filename) gramps-manual.xml:8284(filename) gramps-manual.xml:8301(filename) gramps-manual.xml:8314(filename) gramps-manual.xml:8328(filename)
|
|
msgid "file1.ged"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8272(filename) gramps-manual.xml:8286(filename) gramps-manual.xml:8302(filename) gramps-manual.xml:8329(filename)
|
|
msgid "file2.gpkg"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8273(filename) gramps-manual.xml:8288(filename) gramps-manual.xml:8330(filename)
|
|
msgid "~/db3.gramps"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8274(filename) gramps-manual.xml:8290(filename)
|
|
msgid "file4.wft"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8271(command)
|
|
msgid "gramps -i<placeholder-1/> -i <placeholder-2/> -i <placeholder-3/> -i <placeholder-4/> -a <placeholder-5/>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8280(term)
|
|
msgid "To explicitly specify the formats in the above example, append filenames with appropriate <command>-f</command> options:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8284(command)
|
|
msgid "gramps -i <placeholder-1/> -f <placeholder-2/> -i <placeholder-3/> -f <placeholder-4/> -i <placeholder-5/> -f <placeholder-6/> -i <placeholder-7/> -f <placeholder-8/> -a <placeholder-9/>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8296(term)
|
|
msgid "To record the database resulting from all imports, supply <command>-o</command> flag (use <command>-f</command> if the filename does not allow GRAMPS to guess the format):"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8303(filename) gramps-manual.xml:8316(filename)
|
|
msgid "~/new-package"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8301(command)
|
|
msgid "gramps -i <placeholder-1/> -i <placeholder-2/> -o <placeholder-3/> -f <placeholder-4/>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8309(term)
|
|
msgid "To save any error messages of the above example into files <filename>outfile</filename> and <filename>errfile</filename>, run:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8315(filename)
|
|
msgid "file2.dpkg"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8318(filename)
|
|
msgid "outfile"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8318(filename)
|
|
msgid "errfile"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8314(command)
|
|
msgid "gramps -i <placeholder-1/> -i <placeholder-2/> -o <placeholder-3/> -f <placeholder-4/> ><placeholder-5/> 2><placeholder-6/>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8324(term)
|
|
msgid "To import three databases and start interactive GRAMPS session with the result:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8328(command)
|
|
msgid "gramps -i <placeholder-1/> -i <placeholder-2/> -i <placeholder-3/>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8335(term)
|
|
msgid "To open a database and, based on that data, generate timeline report in PDF format putting the output into the <filename>my_timeline.pdf</filename> file:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8340(filename)
|
|
msgid "file.grdb"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8342(replaceable)
|
|
msgid "name=timeline,off=pdf,of=my_timeline.pdf"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8340(command)
|
|
msgid "gramps -O <placeholder-1/> -a <placeholder-2/> -p <placeholder-3/>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8346(para)
|
|
msgid "Use the <replaceable>name=timeline,show=all</replaceable> to find out about all available options for the timeline report. To find out details of a particular option, use <replaceable>show=option_name</replaceable>, e.g. <replaceable>name=timeline,show=off</replaceable> string."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8352(para)
|
|
msgid "To learn about available report names, use <replaceable>name=show</replaceable> string."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8359(term)
|
|
msgid "Finally, to start normal interactive session type:"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8362(command)
|
|
msgid "gramps"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. $Id: gramps-manual.xml 6994 2006-07-05 19:41:59Z dallingham $
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8376(title)
|
|
msgid "About GRAMPS"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8378(para)
|
|
msgid "GRAMPS was written by Donald N. Allingham (<email>don@gramps-project.org</email>)."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8384(para)
|
|
msgid "Larry Allingham"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8388(para)
|
|
msgid "Jens Arvidsson"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8392(para)
|
|
msgid "Marcos Bedinelli"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8396(para)
|
|
msgid "Douglas S. Blank"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8400(para)
|
|
msgid "Radu Bogdan Mare"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8404(para)
|
|
msgid "Alexander Bogdashevsky"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8408(para)
|
|
msgid "Richard Bos"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8412(para)
|
|
msgid "Nathan Bullock"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8416(para)
|
|
msgid "Lorenzo Cappelletti"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8420(para)
|
|
msgid "Pier Luigi Cinquantini"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8424(para)
|
|
msgid "Bruce J. DeGrasse"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8428(para)
|
|
msgid "Alexandre Duret-Lutz"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8432(para)
|
|
msgid "Billy C. Earney"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8436(para)
|
|
msgid "Baruch Even"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8440(para)
|
|
msgid "Bernd Felsche"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8444(para)
|
|
msgid "Egyeki Gergely"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8448(para)
|
|
msgid "Michel Guitel"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8452(para)
|
|
msgid "Steve Hall"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8456(para)
|
|
msgid "David R. Hampton"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8460(para)
|
|
msgid "Martin Hawlisch"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8464(para)
|
|
msgid "Anton Huber"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8468(para)
|
|
msgid "Frode Jemtland"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8472(para)
|
|
msgid "Greg Kuperberg"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8476(para)
|
|
msgid "Arkadiusz Lipiec"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8480(para)
|
|
msgid "Lars Kr. Lundin"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8484(para)
|
|
msgid "Radek Malcic"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8488(para)
|
|
msgid "Leonid Mamtchenkov"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8492(para)
|
|
msgid "Tino Meinen"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8496(para)
|
|
msgid "Frederick Noronha"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8500(para)
|
|
msgid "Jeffrey C. Ollie"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8504(para)
|
|
msgid "Donald A. Peterson"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8508(para)
|
|
msgid "Guillaume Pratte"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8512(para)
|
|
msgid "Laurent Protois"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8516(para)
|
|
msgid "Matthieu Pupat"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8520(para)
|
|
msgid "Trevor Rhodes"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8524(para)
|
|
msgid "Alexander Roitman"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8528(para)
|
|
msgid "Jason Salaz"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8532(para)
|
|
msgid "Julio Sanchez"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8536(para)
|
|
msgid "Bernd Schandl"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8540(para)
|
|
msgid "Martin Senftleben"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8544(para)
|
|
msgid "Gary Shao"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8548(para)
|
|
msgid "Jim Smart"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8552(para)
|
|
msgid "Steve Swales"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8556(para)
|
|
msgid "Eero Tamminen"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8560(para)
|
|
msgid "Samuel Tardieu"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8564(para)
|
|
msgid "Richard Taylor"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8568(para)
|
|
msgid "James Treacy"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8572(para)
|
|
msgid "Sebastian Voecking"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8576(para)
|
|
msgid "Xing Wang"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8580(para)
|
|
msgid "Tim Waugh"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8584(para)
|
|
msgid "Jesper Zedlitz"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8381(para)
|
|
msgid "The somewhat incomplete list of contributors includes (in alphabetical order): <placeholder-1/> If you know of somebody else who should be listed here, please let us know."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8589(para)
|
|
msgid "To find more information about GRAMPS, please visit the <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://gramps-project.org\">GRAMPS Project Web page</ulink>."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8593(para)
|
|
msgid "To report a bug or make a suggestion regarding this application or this manual, use the help menu in GRAMPS, or follow the directions on <ulink type=\"http\" url=\"http://gramps.sourceforce.net/contact.html\">this site.</ulink>"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:8598(para)
|
|
msgid "This program is distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public license as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. A copy of this license can be found at this <ulink type=\"help\" url=\"ghelp:gpl\">link</ulink>, or in the file COPYING included with the source code of this program."
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|
|
#. Put one translator per line, in the form of NAME <EMAIL>, YEAR1, YEAR2.
|
|
#: gramps-manual.xml:0(None)
|
|
msgid "translator-credits"
|
|
msgstr ""
|
|
|